Administrator Guide

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsAccess PlatformsOS9

Dell Command Line Reference Guide for the

S3048–ON System

9.14.2.8

September 2020

Rev. A00

Summary of content (1694 pages)

PAGE 1
Dell Command Line Reference Guide for the S3048–ON System 9.14.2.8 September 2020 Rev.
PAGE 2
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2020 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
PAGE 3
Contents Chapter 1: About this Guide.........................................................................................................40 Objectives........................................................................................................................................................................... 40 Audience..............................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 4
banner login........................................................................................................................................................................ 86 banner motd....................................................................................................................................................................... 88 cam-acl...........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 5
show memory................................................................................................................................................................... 136 show processes cpu........................................................................................................................................................ 137 show processes ipc flow-control...............................................................................................................................
PAGE 6
access-class................................................................................................................................................................ 187 clear counters ip access-group.............................................................................................................................. 188 ip access-group..........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 7
match community..................................................................................................................................................... 245 match interface......................................................................................................................................................... 246 match ip address.......................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 8
seq ether-type (for Extended MAC ACLs).............................................................................................................. 296 seq (for IP ACLs)............................................................................................................................................................ 297 seq (for IPv6 ACLs).......................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 9
bgp bestpath med missing-as-best.......................................................................................................................347 bgp bestpath router-id ignore................................................................................................................................348 bgp client-to-client reflection................................................................................................................................ 348 bgp cluster-id..................
PAGE 10
neighbor peer-group passive..................................................................................................................................392 neighbor remote-as.................................................................................................................................................. 393 neighbor remove-private-as................................................................................................................................... 394 neighbor route-map..
PAGE 11
BGP Extended Communities (RFC 4360)................................................................................................................ 450 set extcommunity rt................................................................................................................................................. 450 set extcommunity soo..............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 12
show show show show show show show show hardware hardware hardware hardware hardware hardware hardware hardware stack-unit...................................................................................................................................... 484 buffer interface............................................................................................................................492 counters interface ......................................................................................
PAGE 13
ip dhcp relay information-option........................................................................................................................... 529 ip dhcp relay source-interface............................................................................................................................... 530 ipv6 dhcp relay source-interface...........................................................................................................................
PAGE 14
disable.................................................................................................................................................................................571 garp timers........................................................................................................................................................................572 gvrp enable..................................................................................................................................
PAGE 15
dampening................................................................................................................................................................... 614 default interface.........................................................................................................................................................615 description......................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 16
application (for HTTP and ICMP)......................................................................................................................... 679 clear management application pkt-cntr...............................................................................................................680 clear management application pkt-fallback-cntr...............................................................................................680 management egress-interface-selection.....................
PAGE 17
debug ip packet................................................................................................................................................................ 719 icmp6-redirect enable.....................................................................................................................................................721 ip address....................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 18
cam-ipv6 extended-prefix............................................................................................................................................. 777 clear ipv6 fib..................................................................................................................................................................... 778 clear ipv6 route..............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 19
graceful-restart t1............................................................................................................................................................821 graceful-restart t2.......................................................................................................................................................... 822 graceful-restart t3........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 20
lacp system-priority........................................................................................................................................................868 port-channel-protocol lacp...........................................................................................................................................869 show lacp..............................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 21
advertise management-tlv (Interface)................................................................................................................. 910 clear lldp counters...................................................................................................................................................... 911 clear lldp neighbors....................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 22
show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa........................................................................................................................... 951 Chapter 32: Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol.................................................................... 953 clear ipv6 mld groups.....................................................................................................................................................953 debug ipv6 mld.........................................
PAGE 23
show ip multicast-cam.............................................................................................................................................984 show ip mroute..........................................................................................................................................................985 show ip rpf..................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 24
show track ipv6 route............................................................................................................................................ 1022 track interface ipv6 routing.................................................................................................................................. 1023 track ipv6 route metric threshold........................................................................................................................
PAGE 25
show ip ospf asbr.....................................................................................................................................................1070 show ip ospf database.............................................................................................................................................1071 show ip ospf database asbr-summary................................................................................................................
PAGE 26
show crypto ipsec policy........................................................................................................................................ 1128 show crypto ipsec sa ipv6......................................................................................................................................1129 show ipv6 ospf database.........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 27
IPv6 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands...........................................................................................................................1177 clear ipv6 pim tib...................................................................................................................................................... 1178 debug ipv6 pim..........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 28
Chapter 43: Quality of Service (QoS)....................................................................................... 1219 Global Configuration Commands................................................................................................................................1219 qos-rate-adjust......................................................................................................................................................... 1219 Per-Port QoS Commands..........................
PAGE 29
wred ecn.................................................................................................................................................................... 1265 wred-profile.............................................................................................................................................................. 1266 DSCP Color Map Commands......................................................................................................................................
PAGE 30
show rmon history......................................................................................................................................................... 1310 show rmon log................................................................................................................................................................. 1311 show rmon statistics........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 31
service password-encryption................................................................................................................................1353 show privilege...........................................................................................................................................................1354 show users................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 32
dot1x server-timeout............................................................................................................................................... 1391 dot1x supplicant-timeout........................................................................................................................................ 1391 dot1x tx-period.........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 33
drop icmp...................................................................................................................................................................1433 System Security Commands.......................................................................................................................................1433 boot-access password...........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 34
snmp-server user..................................................................................................................................................... 1473 snmp-server user (for AES128-CFB Encryption)............................................................................................ 1476 snmp-server view.................................................................................................................................................... 1477 snmp-server vrf..............
PAGE 35
storm-control storm-control storm-control storm-control storm-control storm-control broadcast (Interface)........................................................................................................................ 1535 multicast (Configuration)................................................................................................................. 1536 multicast (Interface)...................................................................................................................
PAGE 36
enable......................................................................................................................................................................... 1569 url................................................................................................................................................................................ 1569 show eula-consent.................................................................................................................................
PAGE 37
uplink-state-group........................................................................................................................................................ 1608 upstream......................................................................................................................................................................... 1609 Chapter 60: VLAN Stacking.......................................................................................................1611 dei honor...........
PAGE 38
peer-routing-timeout.................................................................................................................................................... 1647 primary-priority.............................................................................................................................................................. 1648 show vlt brief................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 39
crypto x509 revocation............................................................................................................................................... 1689 debug crypto.................................................................................................................................................................. 1690 logging secure...................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 40
1 About this Guide This guide provides information about the Dell EMC Networking operating system (OS) command line interface (CLI). This book also includes information about the protocols and features supported in Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 41
Information Icons This guide uses the following information symbols: NOTE: The Note icon signals important operational information. CAUTION: The Caution icon signals information about situations that could result in equipment damage or loss of data. NOTE: The Warning icon signals information about hardware handling that could result in injury.
PAGE 42
2 CLI Basics This chapter describes the command line interface (CLI) structure and command modes. The Dell EMC Networking operating software commands are in a text-based interface that allows you to use the launch commands, change command modes, and configure interfaces and protocols.
PAGE 43
User "admin" on line vty0 ( 123.12.1.123 ) User "admin" on line vty1 ( 123.12.1.123 ) User "Irene" on line vty3 ( 123.12.1.321 ) DellEMC#conf When another user enters CONFIGURATION mode, Dell EMC Networking OS sends a message similar to the following: % Warning: User "admin" on line vty2 "172.16.1.210" is in configuration In this case, the user is “admin” on vty2.
PAGE 44
When entering commands, you can take advantage of the following timesaving features: ● Commands are not case-sensitive. ● Enter partial (truncated) command keywords. For example, you can enter int teng 1/1/1 for the interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 command. ● Use the TAB key to complete keywords in commands. ● Use the up Arrow key to display the last enabled command. ● Use either the Backspace key or Delete key to erase the previous character.
PAGE 45
Using the no Command To disable, delete or return to default values, use the no form of the commands. For most commands, if you type the keyword no in front of the command, you disable that command or delete it from the running configuration. In this guide, the no form of the command is described in the Syntax portion of the command description.
PAGE 46
Enabling Software Features on Devices Using a Command Option The capability to activate software applications or components on a device using a command is supported on this platform. Starting with Release 9.4(0.0), you can enable or disable specific software features or applications that need to run on a device by using a command attribute in the CLI interface. This enables effective, streamlined management and administration of applications and utilities that run on a device.
PAGE 47
show feature Verify the status of software applications, such as VRF, that are activated and running on a device. Syntax show feature Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) Updated the command to display the IPV6acloptimized feature on the S6100– ON and Z9100–ON. 9.12(1.
PAGE 48
To enter CLASS-MAP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the class-map command, and then enter the class map name. The prompt changes to include config-classmap. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. CONFIGURATION Mode In EXEC Privilege mode, use the configure command to enter CONFIGURATION mode and configure routing protocols and access interfaces. To enter CONFIGURATION mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to EXEC Privilege mode. 2.
PAGE 49
You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. EIS Mode To enable or configure Egress Interface Selection (EIS), use EIS mode. To enter EIS mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the management egress-interface-selection command. The prompt changes to include conf-mgmt-eis. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. EXEC Mode When you initially log in to the switch, by default, you are logged in to EXEC mode.
PAGE 50
To enter INTERFACE mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the interface command and then enter an interface type and interface number that is available on the switch. NOTE: In Dell EMC Networking OS, the stack unit number and interfaces start from 0. But in Dell EMC Networking OS Open Networking platforms, the stack unit number and interfaces start from 1. The prompt changes to include the designated interface and slot/port number.
PAGE 51
LLDP Mode To enable and configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), use LLDP mode. For more information, see Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). To enter LLDP mode: 1. To enable LLDP globally, verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. To enable LLDP on an interface, verify that you are logged in to INTERFACE mode. 2. Enter the protocol lldp command. The prompt changes to include conf-lldp or conf-if-interface-lldp.
PAGE 52
To enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree mstp command. The prompt changes to include conf-mstp. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. OPENFLOW INSTANCE Mode To enable and configure OpenFlow instances, use OPENFLOW INSTANCE mode. To enter OPENFLOW INSTANCE mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2.
PAGE 53
2. Enter the protocol gvrp command. The prompt changes to include config-gvrp. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. RAPID SPANNING TREE (RSTP) Mode To enable and configure RSTP, use RSTP mode. For more information, see Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). To enter RSTP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree rstp command. The prompt changes to include conf-rstp.
PAGE 54
ROUTER OSPFV3 Mode To configure OSPF for IPv6, use ROUTER OSPFV3 mode. To enter ROUTER OSPFV3 mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the ipv6 router ospf {process-id} command. The prompt changes to include conf-ipv6-router_ospf. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. ROUTER RIP Mode To enable and configure Router Information Protocol (RIP), use ROUTER RIP mode. For more information, see Routing Information Protocol (RIP). To enter ROUTER RIP mode: 1.
PAGE 55
2. Enter the vlt domain command, and then the VLT domain number. The prompt changes to include conf-vlt-domain. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command. VRRP Mode To enable and configure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), use VRRP mode. For more information, see Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP). To enter VRRP mode: 1. To enable VRRP globally, verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the vrrp-group command, and then enter the VRRP group ID.
PAGE 56
3 File Management This section contains command line interface (CLI) commands needed to manage the configuration files, as well as other file management commands.
PAGE 57
secondary Enter the keyword secondary to specify the secondary Dell EMC Networking OS image. system: Enter the keyword system: to use the system image file URL (system). ftp: Enter the keyword FTP: to retrieve the image from an FTP server. ftp:// userid:password@hostip/filepath. nfsmount Enter the keyword nfsmount: to retrieve the image from a mounted NFS file system. nfsmount://filepath system: Enter the keyword system: to retrieve the image from the system.
PAGE 58
Parameters flash: Use the keyword flash: to change the current directory to internal flash and its sub directories. usbflash: Use the keyword usbflash: to change the current directory to the inserted USB. directory name and path Enter the directory name and path as follows: directory name ([[flash://]directory_path]) NOTE: The cd command without any arguments will change the current directory to flash: Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 59
running-config Enter the keywords running-config to copy from the current system configuration. scp: Enter the keyword scp: to copy from the remote file system, IPv4, or IPv6, (scp://userid:password@hostip/filepath). startup-config Enter the keywords startup-config to copy from the startup configuration. tftp: Enter the keyword tftp: to copy from the remote file system, IPv4, or IPv6, (tftp://hostip/filepath). usbflash: Enter the keyword usbflash: to copy the file to or from the external USB flash.
PAGE 60
When you load the startup configuration or a configuration file from a network server such as TFTP to the running configuration, the configuration is added to the running configuration. This does not replace the existing running configuration. Commands in the configuration file has precedence over commands in the running configuration. Dell EMC Networking OS supports copying the running-configuration to a TFTP server, an FTP server, or a remote NFS file system.
PAGE 61
Related Commands ● cd – changes the working directory. delete Delete a file from the flash. After deletion, files cannot be restored. Syntax Parameters delete {flash: | nfsmount: | usbflash:} [no-confirm] flash: To delete a file or directory on the internal flash, enter flash:// then the filename or directory name ([flash://]filepath). nfsmount: To delete a file or directory on the NFS-mounted file system, enter nfsmount:// then the mount point and the file path (nfsmount://filepath).
PAGE 62
Parameters flash: For a directory on the internal Flash, enter flash:// directory name. nfsmount: For a file or directory on an NFS-mounted file system, enter nfsmount:// then the mount point and file path. NOTE: While displaying a file directory on a remote NFS file system, it is mandatory to specify the mount-point that indicates the working directory on the NFS file system. You cannot display details corresponding to the root directory of the remote NFS file system.
PAGE 63
nfsmount: 1463410688 bytes total (585719808 bytes free) DellEMC# Related Commands ● cd — changes the working directory. format Erase all existing files and reformat the file system. After the file system is formatted, files cannot be restored. Syntax format {flash: | usbflash:} Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 64
usbflash: Defaults For a directory on the external USB flash, enter usbflash:// directory name. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 65
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series. DellEMC# mkdir nfsmount:/nfs-mountpoint/guest DellEMC# ● rmdir — remove a directory. mount nfs Mounts an NFS file system to a device. Syntax mount nfs rhost:path mount-point [username password] Parameters Enter the following location keywords and information: rhost:path Enter the remote hosts’s path directory. mount-point Enter the folder name in the local file system.
PAGE 66
Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 67
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Enhanced to specify the MD5, SHA1, or SHA256 hash of the OS image that the system uses to validate the image during reboot. 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.
PAGE 68
○ hardware forwarding-table mode {scaled-l2-switch | scaled-l3-routes | scaled-l3-hosts} ○ cam-ipv6 extended-prefix {1024 | 2048 | 3072} ○ ip ecmp-group maximum-paths 2-64 ● ACL CAM carving related CLIs: ○ cam-acl cli ○ cam-acl-vlan cli ○ cam-acl-egress cli ○ cam-sharing ● Feature keyword CLIs: ○ feature udf-acl ○ feature aclrange ○ feature ipv6acloptimized ○ feature acloptimized Example DellEMC# upgrade system tftp://10.11.8.12/dv-rainier-13 a: 00:39:32 : Discarded 1 pkts. Expected block num : 51.
PAGE 69
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the S6000, Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. copy http://admin:admin123@10.16.206.77/sample_file flash://sample_file rename Rename a file in the local file system. Syntax Parameters rename url url url Enter the following keywords and a filename: ● For a file on the internal Flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename.
PAGE 70
restore factory-defaults Restore factory defaults. Syntax restore factory-defaults stack-unit {stack—unit—number | all} {clear-all | bootvar | nvram} Parameters factory-defaults Return the system to its factory default mode. stack-unitnumber Enter the stack member unit identifier to restore only the mentioned stack-unit. The range is from 1 to 6. all Enter the keyword all to restore all units in the stack. bootvar Enter the keyword bootvar to reset boot line.
PAGE 71
● ● ● ● macaddr mgmtautoneg mgmtspeed100 mgmtfullduplex Each boot path variable (primary_boot, secondary_boot, and default_boot) is further split into the following three independent variables: ● primary_server, primary_file, and primary_type ● secondary_server, secondary_file, and secondary_type ● default_server, default_file, and default_type NOTE: For information on the default values that these variables take, refer to the Restoring Factory Default Environment Variables section in the Dell EMC Network
PAGE 72
3 Success 4 Not present 5 Not present Power-cycling the unit(s). DellEMC# Example (NvRAM, single unit) DellEMC# restore factory-defaults stack-unit 1 nvram ************************************************************** * Warning - Restoring factory defaults will delete the existing * * persistent settings (stacking, fanout, etc.) * * After restoration the unit(s) will be powercycled immediately.
PAGE 73
Example DellEMC# show boot system stack-unit 1 Current system image information in the system: ============================================= Type Boot Type A B --------------------------------------------------Stack-unit 1 FLASH BOOT 9-0(2-1) 9-0(2-0)[boot] DellEMC# show bootvar Display the variable settings for the boot parameters. Syntax show bootvar Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 74
Reload Mode = DellEMC# normal-reload show file-systems Display information about the file systems on the system. Syntax show file-systems Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 75
Field Description Flags Displays the access available to the storage location. The following letters indicate the level of access: ● r = read access ● w = write access Prefixes Displays the name of the storage location. show os-version Display the release and software image version information of the image file specified.
PAGE 76
show running-config Display the current configuration and display changes from the default values. Syntax show running-config [entity] [configured] [status] [compressed] Parameters 76 entity File Management (OPTIONAL) To display that entity’s current (non-default) configuration, enter one of the following keywords: NOTE: If you did not configure anything that entity, nothing displays and the prompt returns.
PAGE 77
mac for the current MAC ACL configuration mac-addresstable for the current MAC configuration managementeis for the current management EIS configuration managementroute for the current Management port forwarding configuration mld for the current MLD configuration monitor for the current Monitor configuration mroute for the current Mroutes configuration msdp for the current MSDP configuration ntp for the current NTP configuration ospf for the current OSPF configuration pim for the current
PAGE 78
uplink-stategroup for the uplink state group configuration users for the current users configuration vlt for the current VLT configuration wred-profile for the current wred-profile configuration configured (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword configuration to display line card interfaces with non-default configurations only. status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword status to display the checksum for the running configuration and the start-up configuration.
PAGE 79
boot system stack-unit 1 primary system: A: boot system stack-unit 1 secondary tftp://10.16.127.35/DellSI-9-0-2-0.bin boot system stack-unit 1 default system: A: boot system gateway 10.16.132.
PAGE 80
Example Related Commands Version Description 7.4.1.0 Expanded to include the last configuration change, start-up last updated (date and time), and who made the change. DellEMC# show startup-config ! Version 9-0(2-0) ! Last configuration change at Thu Apr 18 10:18:39 2013 by admin ! Startup-config last updated at Thu Apr 18 10:18:40 2013 by admin ! boot system stack-unit 0 primary system: A: boot system stack-unit 0 secondary tftp://10.16.127.35/DellSI-9-0-2-0.
PAGE 81
Command Fields Lines Beginning With Description Dell EMC Network... Name of the operating system Dell EMC Operating... OS version number Dell EMC Application... Software version Copyright (c)... Copyright information Build Time... Software build’s date stamp Build Path... Location of the software build files loaded on the system Dell EMC Networking OS uptime is... Amount of time the system has been up System image... Image file name System Type: System name Control Processor:...
PAGE 82
stack-unit: Enter the keywords stack-unit: to synch the image to the stack-unit. file-url Enter the following location keywords and information to upgrade using an Dell EMC Networking OS image other than the one currently running: ● To specify an Dell EMC Networking OS image on the internal flash, enter flash:// file-path/filename. ● To specify an Dell EMC Networking OS image on an FTP server, enter ftp:// user:password@hostip/filepath.
PAGE 83
....................................
PAGE 84
4 Control and Monitoring This section contains command information to configure and monitor the system, including Telnet, file transfer protocol (FTP), and trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP).
PAGE 85
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • show debugging show environment show inventory show login statistics show memory show processes cpu show processes ipc flow-control show processes memory show reset-reason show software ifm show system show tech-support ssh-peer-stack-unit telnet telnet-peer-stack-unit terminal length traceroute undebug all virtual-ip write banner exec Configure a message that is displayed when your enter EXEC mode.
PAGE 86
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original Command After entering the banner login command, type one or more spaces and a delineator character. Enter the banner text then the second delineator character.
PAGE 87
Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced the acknowledgement keyword. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 88
banner motd Set a message of the day (MOTD) banner. Syntax banner motd c line c To delete a Message of the Day banner, enter no banner motd. Parameters Defaults c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. The delineator is a percent character (%). line Enter a text string for your MOTD banner the message with your delineator. The delineator is a percent character (%). No banner is configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 89
cam-acl Allocate content addressable memory (CAM) for IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs.
PAGE 90
Usage Information Version Description 9.1.(0.0) Added support for OpenFlow on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Added the keywords fcoeacl and iscsioptacl on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Added the keywords ecfmacl, vman-qos, and vman-dual-qos. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 91
clear average-power Reset the average power and average power start time. Syntax Parameters Defaults clear average-power stack-unit {stack-unit-number} stack-unitnumber Enter the stack unit number. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(2.
PAGE 92
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. configure Enter CONFIGURATION mode from EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 93
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. Example DellEMC# configure DellEMC(conf)# disable Return to EXEC mode. Syntax Parameters Defaults disable [level] level (OPTIONAL) Enter a number for a privilege level of the Dell EMC Networking OS. The range is from 0 to 15.
PAGE 94
Version Description E-Series Original command. do Allows the execution of most EXEC-level commands from all CONFIGURATION levels without returning to the EXEC level. Syntax do command Parameters Defaults command Enter an EXEC-level command. none Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION ● INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Example 94 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 95
DellEMC(conf-if-gi-5/1)# DellEMC(conf-if-gi-5/1)# do reload System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: n DellEMC(conf-if-gi-5/1)# enable Enter EXEC Privilege mode or any other privilege level configured. After entering this command, you may need to enter a password. Syntax Parameters Defaults enable [level] level (OPTIONAL) Enter a number for a privilege level of Dell EMC Networking OS. The range is from 0 to 15.
PAGE 96
enable cpu-clock-monitor Enables Intel CPU LPC (Low Pin Count) clock-failure monitoring. Syntax enable cpu-clock-monitor To disable this feature, use the no enable cpu-clock-monitor command. Parameters None Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(2.
PAGE 97
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.10.0 Replacement command for the S4810 only. Replaces the enable xfp-powerupdates command. To enable polling and to configure the polling frequency, use this command. end Return to EXEC Privilege mode from other command modes (for example, CONFIGURATION or ROUTER OSPF modes).
PAGE 98
Related Commands Version Description E-Series Original command. ● exit — returns to the lower command mode. exec-timeout Set a time interval that the system waits for input on a line before disconnecting the session. Syntax exec-timeout minutes [seconds] To return to default settings, use the no exec-timeout command. Parameters Defaults minutes Enter the number of minutes of inactivity on the system before disconnecting the current session. The range is from 0 to 35791.
PAGE 99
exit Return to the lower command mode. Syntax exit Command Modes ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Command History Related Commands EXEC Privilege CONFIGURATION LINE, INTERFACE TRACE-LIST PROTOCOL GVRP SPANNING TREE MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE MAC ACCESS LIST ACCESS-LIST AS-PATH ACL COMMUNITY-LIST PREFIX-LIST ROUTER OSPF ROUTER RIP ROUTER ISIS ROUTER BGP This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 100
ftp-server enable Enable FTP server functions on the system. Syntax ftp-server [vrf vrf-name] enable Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to enable the FTP server to listen to that VRF instance. NOTE: Use this attribute to specify the VRF that is used by the FTP server to accept client connections. If no VRF is specified, then the default VRF is used. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example 100 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 101
512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 other 512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 tgt 226 Transfer complete 329 bytes received in 0.018 seconds (17.95 Kbytes/s) ftp> ftp-server topdir Specify the top-level directory to be accessed when an incoming FTP connection request is made. Syntax Parameters Defaults ftp-server topdir directory directory Enter the directory path. The internal flash is the default directory. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 102
ftp-server username Create a user name and associated password for incoming FTP server sessions. Syntax ftp-server username username password [encryption-type] password To delete a user name and its password, use the no ftp-server username username command. Parameters username Enter a text string up to 40 characters long as the user name. password password Enter the keyword password then a string up to 40 characters long as the password.
PAGE 103
Defaults Dell Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 104
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 105
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9500. To make the HTTP clients VRF-aware, use the ip http vrf command. The HTTP client uses the VRF name that you specify to reach the HTTP server. If you do not specify a VRF name, the HTTP client uses the default VRF. ip ftp password Specify a password for outgoing FTP connections.
PAGE 106
Use the ip ftp password command when you use the ftp: parameter in the copy command. Related Commands ip ftp source-interface Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for FTP connections. Syntax ip ftp source-interface interface To delete an interface, use the no ip ftp source-interface interface command.
PAGE 107
Version Description E-Series Original command. ip ftp username Assign a user name for outgoing FTP connection requests. Syntax ip ftp username username To return to anonymous FTP connections, use the no ip ftp username [username] command. Parameters Defaults username Enter a text string as the user name up to 40 characters long. No user name is configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 108
To undo the FTP client configuration, use the ip ftp [vrf vrf-name] command. Parameters Defaults vrf-name Enter the vrf-name to specify the VRF that is used by the FTP client. management Enter the keyword management to specify that the VRF used by the FTP client is a management VRF. Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 109
Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ip ssh server — enables the secure shell (SSH) server on the system. ip telnet server vrf Configures the TELNET server on either a specific VRF or a management VRF.
PAGE 110
Example DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)# ip no ip no telnet server vrf vrf1 ip telnet server vrf telnet server vrf management ip telnet server vrf ip telnet source-interface Set an interface’s IP address as the source address in outgoing packets for Telnet sessions. Syntax ip telnet source-interface interface To return to the default setting, use the no ip telnet source-interface [interface] command.
PAGE 111
Related Commands Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command telnet — telnet to another device. ip telnet vrf Configures a TELNET client to use a specific VRF. Syntax ip telnet [vrf vrf-name] To undo the TELENT client configuration, use the ip telnet [vrf vrf-name] command.
PAGE 112
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults The IP address on the system that is closest to the Telnet address is used in the outgoing packets.
PAGE 113
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z9000.
PAGE 114
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command Usage Information You cannot delete a terminal connection.
PAGE 115
To limit the number of concurrent sessions that any user can have on console, auxiliary, and virtual terminal lines, use the login concurrent-session limit number-of-sessions command. If the login concurrent-session clear-line enable command is configured, you are provided with an option to clear any of your existing sessions after a successful login authentication. When you reach the maximum concurrent session limit, you can still log in by clearing any of your existing sessions.
PAGE 116
no login statistics {enable | time-period days} Parameters Defaults enable Enables login statistics for the last 30 days by default. time-period days Sets the number of days the system stores user login statistics; range is from 1 to 30. Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 117
Connected to 10.11.178.14. Escape character is '^]'. Login: admin Password: Last successful login: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 on console There were 2 unsuccessful login attempt(s) since the last successful login. There were 3 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 12 day(s). There were 1 successful login attempt(s) for user admin in the last 30 day(s). The preceding message shows that the user had previously logged in to the system using the console line.
PAGE 118
ping Test connectivity between the system and another device by sending echo requests and waiting for replies.
PAGE 119
sweep-max-size Enter the maximum size of datagram in sweep range. The range is from 53 to 15359 bytes. sweep-interval Enter the incremental value for sweep size. The range is from 1 to 15308 seconds. interface (IPv4 only) Enter the outgoing interface for multicast packets. Enter the IP address in A.B.C.D format. ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 120
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6 address on the E-Series. When you enter the ping command without specifying an IP/IPv6 address (Extended Ping), you are prompted for a target IP/IPv6 address, a repeat count, a datagram size (up to 1500 bytes), a timeout (in seconds), and for Extended Commands.
PAGE 121
no-confirm Reload the chassis without prompting for further confirmation. [discard-running] dell-diag (OPTIONAL) Reload the system into the Dell diagnostics mode. onie (OPTIONAL) Reload the system into the ONIE mode.
PAGE 122
Example The following example shows how to reload the system: DellEMC# reload Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: yes The following example shows how to reload the system into Dell diagnostics mode: DellEMC#reload dell-diag Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: yes The following example shows how to reload the system into ONIE mode: DellEMC#reload onie Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: yes The following example shows how to reload the system into ONIE prompt and enter the install mode directly: DellE
PAGE 123
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON Once you enter reload-type, you need to enter the boot-type required on the next reboot.
PAGE 124
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 125
utc Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword utc to include the UTC time format (ignoring local time zone) in the timestamp. ● datetime [localtime] ● datetime Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.5) Added support for UTC time format. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 126
● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON.
PAGE 127
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. Version 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on S4810. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T.
PAGE 128
The timestamps display format of the show command-history output changes based on the service timestamps log datetime configuration. The time format can be in uptime, local time or UTC time. If timestamp is disabled (no service timestamps log), the command history time format is shown with timestamp defaults (service timestamps log datetime localtime) as in Example 4.
PAGE 129
DellEMC(conf)#no service timestamps log DellEMC# show command-history [May 17 15:53:44]: CMD-(CLI):[show logging]by default from console [May 17 15:53:53]: CMD-(CLI):[show command-history]by default from console [May 17 15:54:54]: CMD-(CLI):[end]by default from console [May 17 15:55:00]: CMD-(CLI):[show logging]by default from console [May 17 15:55:12]: CMD-(CLI):[show clock]by default from console [May 17 15:55:22]: CMD-(CLI):[show running-config]by default from console [May 17 15:55:27]: CMD-(CLI):[show c
PAGE 130
Usage Information Traffic statistics are sorted on a per-interface basis; the interface receiving the most traffic is displayed first. All CPU and port information is displayed unless a specific port or CPU is specified. Traffic information is displayed for router ports only; not for management interfaces. The traffic statistics are collected only after the debug cpu-traffic-stats command is executed; not from the system bootup.
PAGE 131
Example Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series E-Series Original command.
PAGE 132
Usage Information Example (all) Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.8.1.0 The output of the show environment fan command for the S Series is changed to display fan speeds instead of showing the fan status as up or down. The following example shows the output of the show environment command.
PAGE 133
show inventory Display the switch type, components (including media), and Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS), including hardware identification numbers and configured protocols. Syntax Parameters Defaults show inventory [media slot] media slot (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword media then the stack ID of the stack member for which you want to display pluggable media inventory. NOTE: This parameter is available but not supported in Dell EMC Networking Operating System version 8.3.11.4.
PAGE 134
show login statistics Displays login statistics of users who have used the console or virtual terminal lines to log in to the system. Syntax show login statistics [all | [[successful-attempts | unsuccessful-attempts] [user login-id] [time-period days]] | user login-id] Parameters Defaults all (Optional)Displays the login statistics of all users in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period.
PAGE 135
Example The following is sample output of the show login statistics command. DellEMC#show login statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
PAGE 136
The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts command. DellEMC#show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts There were 3 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 30 day(s). The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts time-period days command. DellEMC# show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts time-period 15 There were 0 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 15 day(s).
PAGE 137
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced this version of the command for the S-Series. The output for show memory displays the memory usage of LP part (sysdlp) of the system. The sysdlp is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on the S-Series’ CPU.
PAGE 138
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Added the keywords management-unit [details]. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 139
Process Process: system PID: 0 CoreID: 3 Process: sysdlp PID: 428 CoreID: 0 Process: sysd PID: 410 CoreID: 2 TID Runtime(ms) Thread 56 20 0 usm 55 10 DHCLIENT 54 0 0 cms 53 60 portmirr 52 0 cfgDataSync 51 0 sysCompMgr 50 50 0 statMgr 49 1010 0 sflCp 48 30 0 snmp 47 0 dpi_cmow 46 0 dpi_taskcmo CPU usage: 5sec - 13.12% 1min - 13.37% 5min - 12.94% CPU usage: 5sec - 3.78% 1min - 2.56% 5min - 3.40% CPU usage: 5sec - 1.59% 1min - 0.96% 5min - 2.50% Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min 2 10000 0.00% 0.
PAGE 140
● show hardware layer3 — displays Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe. ● show hardware stack-unit — displays the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member. ● show hardware system-flow — displays Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe. ● show interfaces stack-unit — displays information on all interfaces on a specific S-Series stack member.
PAGE 141
Field Description Destination QID/Rx Process Destination Service Identifier Cur Len Current number of messages enqueued High Mark Highest number of packets in the queue at any time #of to / Timeout Timeout count #of Retr /Retries Number of retransmissions #msg Sent/Msg Sent/ Number of messages sent #msg Ackd/Ack Rcvd Number of messages acknowledged Retr /Available Retra Number of retries left Total/ Max Retra Number of retries allowed Important Points: ● The SWP provides flow control-based
PAGE 142
show processes memory Display memory usage information based on processes running in the S-Series or Z-Series system. Syntax show processes memory {management-unit | stack unit {unit-id | all | summary}} Parameters management-unit Enter the keyword management-unit for CPU memory usage of the stack management unit. stack unit unit id Enter the keyword stack unit then a stack unit ID of the member unit for which to display memory usage on the forwarding processor.
PAGE 143
show processes memory output Field Description ResSize Actual resident size of the process in memory Size Process test, stack, and data size Allocs Total dynamic memory allocated Frees Total dynamic memory freed Max Maximum dynamic memory allocated Current Current dynamic memory in use The output for the show process memory command displays the memory usage statistics running on CP part (sysd) of the system. The sysd is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on SSeries’ CP.
PAGE 144
270 bcmDISC 117927936 0 0 269 bcmATP-RX 117927936 0 0 268 bcmATP-TX 117927936 0 0 267 bcmSTACK 117927936 0 0 266 bcmRX 117927936 0 0 265 bcmLINK.0 117927936 0 0 !----------- output truncated --------------! DellEMC# 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 show reset-reason Display the reason for the last system reboot.
PAGE 145
Example — System reboot due to watchdog timeout Example — System reboot due to thermal shutdown DellEMC#show reset-reason Cause: Watchdog timeout. Reset Time: N/A The example shows that the last system reboot was due to thermal shutdown. DellEMC#show reset-reason Cause: Thermal Shutdown. Reset Time: N/A. Example — The example shows the reason for the last reboot was due to BIOS boot fail. System reboot due to BIOS boot DellEMC#show reset-reason fail Cause: Reset on Boot Ok Fail. Reset Time: N/A.
PAGE 146
stack-unit unit- ID trace-flags Defaults Enter the keyword stack-unit then the stack member number to display IFM information for that unit. Enter the keyword trace-flags to display IFM information for internal trace flags. None. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 147
Parameters brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view an abbreviated list of system information. stack-unit unit-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack member ID for information on t stack member. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Network OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 148
POE Capable FIPS Mode Boot Flash Boot Selector Memory Size Temperature Voltage Serial Number Part Number Vendor Id Date Code Country Code Piece Part ID PPID Revision Service Tag Expr Svc Code Auto Reboot Burned In MAC No Of MACs : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : no disabled 3.24.2.6 3.24.0.
PAGE 149
Usage Information Version Description 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 150
| Pipe through a DellEMC# show tech-support except Show only text find Search for the grep Show only text no-more Don't paginate save Save output to command stack-unit 1 | ? that does not match a pattern first occurrence of a pattern that matches a pattern output a file DellEMC# show tech-support stack-unit 1 | save ? flash: Save to local file system (flash://filename (max 20 chars) ) DellEMC# show tech-support stack-unit 1 | save flash://LauraSave Start saving show command report .......
PAGE 151
FPGA IMAGE INFORMATION : --------------------------------------------------------------------Card FPGA Name Version stack-unit 1 S3048-ON SYSTEM CPLD 9 stack-unit 1 S3048-ON MODULE CPLD 7 ----------------------------------- show revision -------------------------------- Stack unit 1 -S3048-ON SYSTEM CPLD : 9 S3048-ON MODULE CPLD : 7 ------------------------------------ show clock ------------------------------12:20:06.
PAGE 152
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the S-Series. telnet Connect through Telnet to a server.
PAGE 153
● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 154
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 155
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. traceroute View a packet’s path to a specific device.
PAGE 156
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series with IPv6. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series (IPv4 only). 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF. 7.6.1.0 Added support for the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.
PAGE 157
----------------------------------------------Tracing the route to 3ffe:501:ffff:100:201:e8ff:fe00:4c8b, 64 hops max, 60 byte packets ----------------------------------------------Hops Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3 1 3ffe:501:ffff:100:201:e8ff:fe00:4c8b 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms DellEMC# Related Commands ● ping — tests the connectivity to a device. undebug all Disable all debug operations on the system.
PAGE 158
Parameters ipv4-address Enter the IP address of the active management interface in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). ipv6-address Enter an IPv6 address of the active management interface, in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 159
terminal Enter the keyword terminal to copy the current running configuration to the terminal. This command is similar to the show running-config command. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 160
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. Until the authentication, only extensible authentication protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic is allowed through the port to which a client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through the port. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports remote authentication dial-in service (RADIUS) and active directory environments using 802.
PAGE 161
• • • • • dot1x mac show show show tx-period dot1x cos-mapping interface dot1x interface dot1x profile debug dot1x Display 802.1X debugging information. Syntax Parameters debug dot1x [all | auth-pae-fsm | backend-fsm | eapol-pdu] [interface interface] all Enable all debugs in dot1x. auth-pae-fsm Enable Authentication PAE FSM debugs in dot1x. backend-fsm Enable Backend Auth FSM debugs in dot1x. eapol-pdu Enable EAPOL frame trace in dot1x.
PAGE 162
To delete the authentication failure VLAN, use the no dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [maxattempts number] command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier. The range is from 1 to 4094. max-attempts (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords max-attempts followed number of attempts desired before authentication fails. The range is from 1 to 5. The default is 3.
PAGE 163
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 164
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. The prerequisites for enabling MAB-only authentication on a port are: ● Enable 802.1X authentication globally on the switch and on the port (the dot1x authentication command). ● Enable MAC authentication bypass on the port (the dot1x mac-auth-bypass command).
PAGE 165
Related Commands ● dot1x authentication (Interface) — enable dot1x on an interface. dot1x authentication (Interface) Enable dot1x on an interface. Enable dot1x both globally and at the interface level. Syntax dot1x authentication To disable dot1x on an interface, use the no dot1x authentication command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 166
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S4048–ON, S4048–ON, S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, the Configuration Terminal Batch mode on C9010, Z9100–ON, and Z9500. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the C9000 Series.
PAGE 167
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 168
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 169
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 170
Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x max-supplicants Restrict the number of supplicants that can be authenticated and permitted to access the network through the port. This configuration is only takes effect in Multi-auth mode.
PAGE 171
Parameters Defaults force-authorized Enter the keywords force-authorized to forcibly authorize a port. auto Enter the keyword auto to authorize a port based on the 802.1X operation result. forceunauthorized Enter the keywords force-unauthorized to forcibly de-authorize a port. None Command Modes Auto Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 172
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S4048–ON, S4048–ON, S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, the Configuration Terminal Batch mode on C9010, Z9100–ON, and Z9500. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. The dot1x profile command configures a dot1x profile to define a list of trusted supplicant MAC addresses. Maximum number of dot1x profiles is limited to 10.
PAGE 173
dot1x reauthentication Enable periodic reauthentication of the client. Syntax dot1x reauthentication [interval seconds] To disable periodic reauthentication, use the no dot1x reauthentication command. Parameters Defaults interval seconds (Optional) Enter the keyword interval then the interval time, in seconds, after which reauthentication is initiated. The range is from 1 to 31536000 (one year). The default is 3600 (1 hour).
PAGE 174
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 175
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When you configure the dot1x server-timeout value, take into account the communication medium used to communicate with an authentication server and the number of RADIUS servers configured.
PAGE 176
● Ensure that no configured profile exists at the time of configuring the static-mab command. ● Use this command in Interface Batch Mode to enable static MAB in a dual-homing setup. Example DellEMC(conf)#do show dot1x interface twentyFiveGigE 1/41 802.
PAGE 177
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x tx-period Configure the intervals at which EAPOL PDUs the Authenticator PAE transmits. Syntax dot1x tx-period seconds To return to the default, use the no dot1x tx-period command.
PAGE 178
mac Configure a list of supplicant MAC addresses for dot1x profile represented with a profile-name. Syntax [no] mac {mac-address1 mac-address2… mac-address6} Parameters Defaults mac-address1 mac-address2 … mac-address6 Enter the keyword mac and type the 48– bit MAC addresses using the H.H.H format. A maximum of 6 MAC addresses are allowed. None Command Modes DOT1X PROFILE CONFIG (conf-dot1x-profile) CONFIGURATION TERMINAL BATCH Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 179
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 180
4 5 6 7 DellEMC# 3 2 1 0 show dot1x interface Display the 802.1X configuration of an interface. Syntax show dot1x interface interface [mac-address mac-address] Parameters interface Enter one of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 181
Example DellEMC# show dot1x interface gigabitethernet 1/32 802.
PAGE 182
Re-Authentication: Guest VLAN: Guest VLAN id: Auth-Fail VLAN: Auth-Fail VLAN id: Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: Mac-Auth-Bypass: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Max-Supplicants: Disable Enable 100 Disable NONE NONE Enable Enable 3 seconds 60 seconds 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 2 MULTI_AUTH 128 Port status and State info for Supplicant: 00:00:00:00:00:11 Port Auth Status: Untagged VLAN id: Auth PAE St
PAGE 183
6 Access Control Lists (ACL) Access control lists (ACLs) are supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 184
• • • • • • • • • • • • seq arp (for Extended MAC ACLs) seq ether-type (for Extended MAC ACLs) seq (for IP ACLs) seq (for IPv6 ACLs) permit udp (for IPv6 ACLs) permit tcp (for IPv6 ACLs) permit icmp (for IPv6 ACLs) permit (for IPv6 ACLs) deny udp (for IPv6 ACLs) deny tcp (for IPv6 ACLs) deny icmp (for Extended IPv6 ACLs) deny (for IPv6 ACLs) Commands Common to all ACL Types The following commands are available within each ACL mode and do not have mode-specific options.
PAGE 185
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The remark command is available in each ACL mode.
PAGE 186
show config Display the current ACL configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes ● ● ● ● Command History Example CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 187
access-class Apply a standard ACL to a terminal line. Syntax access-class access-list-name [ipv4 | ipv6] To remove an ACL, use the no access-class command. Parameters Defaults access-list-name Enter the name of a configured Standard ACL, up to 140 characters. ipv4 Enter the keyword ipv4 to configure an IPv4 access class. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to configure an IPv6 access class. Not configured. Command Modes LINE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 188
already configured on this terminal line. Before applying either IPv4 or IPv6 filtering, first undo the generic configuration using the no access-class access-list-name command. Similarly, if you have configured either IPv4 or IPv6 specific filtering on a terminal line, you cannot apply generic IP ACLs on top of this configuration. Before applying the generic ACL configuration, first undo the existing configuration using the no access-class access-list-name [ipv4 | ipv6] command.
PAGE 189
Parameters Defaults access-list-name Enter the name of a configured access list, up to 140 characters. in Enter the keyword in to apply the ACL to incoming traffic. out Enter the keyword out to apply the ACL to outgoing traffic. implicit-permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword implicit-permit to change the default action of the ACL from implicit-deny to implicit-permit (that is, if the traffic does not match the filters in the ACL, the traffic is permitted instead of dropped).
PAGE 190
NOTE: This command supports Loopback interfaces EE3 and EF series route processor modules (RPMs). This command does not support Loopback interfaces ED series RPMs and S-Series Loopback interfaces. NOTE: If you apply outbound(egress) IP acl on a switch port, the filter applies only for routed traffic egressing out of that port. To associate an access-list to a non-default VRF, use the vrf attribute of this command.
PAGE 191
NOTE: This command supports Loopback interfaces EE3 and EF series route processor modules (RPMs). This command does not support Loopback interfaces ED series RPMs and S-Series Loopback interfaces. NOTE: If you apply outbound(egress) IPv6 ACL on a switch port, the filter applies only for routed traffic egressing out of that port. In the Dell EMC Networking OS versions prior to 9.13(0.
PAGE 192
Parameters access-list-name Enter the name of the ACL to be displayed. cam_count List the count of the CAM rules for this ACL. interface Enter the keyword interface then the one of the following keywords and the interface information: interface ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 193
Example show ip accounting accesslists Field Description “Extended IP...” Displays the name of the IP ACL. “seq 5...” Displays the filter. If the keywords count or byte were configured in the filter, the number of packets or bytes the filter processes is displayed at the end of the line. “order 4” Displays the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry. DellEMC# show ip accounting access-list L3-ACL vrf vrf3 ! Standard Ingress IP access list L3-ACL on vrf3 Total cam count 3 seq 5 permit 10.1.2.
PAGE 194
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Standard IP ACL Commands When you create an ACL without any rule and then apply it to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects an implicit permit. The platform supports both Ingress and Egress IP ACLs. NOTE: Also refer to the Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common IP ACL Commands sections. deny To drop packets with a certain IP address, configure a filter.
PAGE 195
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Removed the session–ID option from the monitor parameter. 9.11(0.0) Added support for session–ID to the monitor parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 196
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 197
Parameters Defaults source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was sent. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address or hostname.
PAGE 198
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Add the DSCP value for ACL matching. 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for the non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.
PAGE 199
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series (IPv6). 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series (IPv4). 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names were up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 200
Defaults monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to describe the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. NOTE: For more information, see “Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. no-drop Enter the keywords no-drop to match only the forwarded packets.
PAGE 201
● If you configure sequence-number, the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for rules with the same order. Related Commands ● deny — configure a filter to drop packets. ● permit — configure a filter to forward packets. Extended IP ACL Commands When an ACL is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects an implicit permit. The following commands configure extended IP ACLs, which in addition to the IP address, also examine the packet’s protocol type.
PAGE 202
Defaults count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets that the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes that the filter processes. log (OPTIONAL, E-Series only) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log. dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
PAGE 203
Usage Information Version Description 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, see the Quality of Service section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. When you use the log option, the CP processor logs detail the packets that match.
PAGE 204
Defaults dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
PAGE 205
Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, see the Quality of Service section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. For more information, see Port Monitoring . deny tcp Configure a filter that drops transmission control protocol (TCP) packets meeting the filter criteria.
PAGE 206
● range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535. The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: ● ● ● ● Defaults 23 = Telnet 20 and 21 = FTP 25 = SMTP 169 = SNMP destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D.
PAGE 207
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Added the keyword dscp. 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option.
PAGE 208
deny udp To drop user datagram protocol (UDP) packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [ttl operator] [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] [order] [fragments] [monitor] [no-drop] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 209
Defaults fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to describe the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. For more information, see Flow-based Monitoring in the Port Monitoring section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. no-drop Enter the keywords no-drop to match only the forwarded packets. Not configured.
PAGE 210
NOTE: When you configure ACL logging and byte counters simultaneously, byte counters may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead. Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (for example, gt, lt or range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on bit mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.
PAGE 211
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names were up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.
PAGE 212
● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value. ● gt(greater than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is greater than the specified ttl value. ● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value.
PAGE 213
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.1.0 Add the DSCP value for ACL matching. 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for the non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry.
PAGE 214
● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value. ● gt(greater than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is greater than the specified ttl value. ● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value.
PAGE 215
Usage Information Version Description 9.11(2.0P0) Added the established parameter on the S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON. 9.11(0.0) Added support for session–ID to the monitor parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 216
5 6 7 8 0001110000000000 0001111000000000 0001111100000000 0001111101000000 1111111000000000 1111111100000000 1111111111000000 1111111111111111 7168 7680 7936 8000 7679 7935 7999 8000 512 256 64 1 Total Ports: 4001 Example An ACL rule with a TCP port lt 1023 uses only one entry in the CAM. DellEMC# Data Mask 1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 From To #Covered 1023 1024 Total Ports: 1024 Related Commands ● ip access-list extended — create an extended ACL.
PAGE 217
● ● ● ● ● Defaults eq = equal to neq = not equal to gt = greater than lt = less than range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter) port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is 0 to 65535. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
PAGE 218
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. . 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, see the “Quality of Service” section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 219
access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list, up to 140 characters. Defaults StartingSeqNum Enter the starting sequence number to resequence. The range is from 0 to 4294967290. Step-toIncrement Enter the step to increment the sequence number. The range is from 1 to 4294967290. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 220
permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this criteria. ip-protocolnumber Enter a number from 0 to 255 to filter based on the protocol identified in the IP protocol header. icmp Enter the keyword icmp to configure an ICMP access list filter. ip Enter the keyword ip to configure a generic IP access list. The keyword ip specifies that the access list permits all IP protocols. tcp Enter the keyword tcp to configure a TCP access list filter.
PAGE 221
Defaults dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DSCP values. The range is from 0 to 63. ecn (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ecn to match to the ECN values. The range is from 0 to 3. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255).
PAGE 222
Usage Information Version Description 7.4.1.0 Added support for the non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. Deprecated the keyword established. 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. For more information, refer to Port Monitoring. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only.
PAGE 223
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.
PAGE 224
Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.
PAGE 225
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 226
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.
PAGE 227
Parameters Defaults any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match). count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
PAGE 228
mac access-list standard To configure a standard MAC ACL, name a new or existing MAC access control list (MAC ACL) and enter MAC ACCESS LIST mode. Also refer to the Commands Common to all ACL Types section and the Common MAC Access List Commands section. Syntax mac access-list standard mac-list-name To delete a MAC access list, use the no mac access-list standard mac-list-name command.
PAGE 229
permit To forward packets from a specific source MAC address, configure a filter. Syntax permit {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] | [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no permit {any | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} command.
PAGE 230
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When you use the log option, the CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details.
PAGE 231
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the no-drop parameter. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 232
● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no deny {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-sourceaddress-mask} {any | host mac-address | mac-destination-address macdestination-address-mask} command. Parameters any Enter the keyword any to drop all packets. host macaddress Enter the keyword host and then enter a MAC address to drop packets with that host address. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
PAGE 233
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.
PAGE 234
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.
PAGE 235
● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no permit {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-sourceaddress-mask} {any | mac-destination-address mac-destination-addressmask} command. Parameters any Enter the keyword any to forward all packets. host Enter the keyword host then a MAC address to forward packets with that host address. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
PAGE 236
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added the monitor option. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When you use the log option, the CP processor logs details about the packets that match.
PAGE 237
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increase the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names were up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 238
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Sequence numbers for this filter are automatically assigned starting at sequence number 5.
PAGE 239
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information Prefix lists redistribute OSPF and RIP routes meeting specific criteria. Related Commands ● show ip route list — display IP routes in an IP prefix list. ● show ip prefix-list summary — display a summary of the configured prefix lists. seq To a deny or permit filter in a prefix list while configuring the filter, assign a sequence number.
PAGE 240
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.3.1.0 Added the bit mask option. If you do not use the ge or le options, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered.
PAGE 241
ip prefix-list snickers DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)# show ip prefix-list detail Display details of the configured prefix lists. Syntax Parameters show ip prefix-list detail [prefix-name] prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 242
show ip prefix-list summary Display a summary of the configured prefix lists. Syntax show ip prefix-list summary [prefix-name] Parameters prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 243
continue To a route-map entry with a higher sequence number, configure a route-map. Syntax Parameters Defaults continue [sequence-number] sequencenumber (OPTIONAL) Enter the route map sequence number. The range is from 1 to 65535. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(1.
PAGE 244
● If a set action occurs in the first route map entry and then the same set action occurs with a different value in a subsequent route map entry, the last set of actions overrides the previous set of actions with the same set command. ● If set community additive and set as-path prepend are configure, the communities and AS numbers are prepended. Related Commands ● set community — specify a COMMUNITY attribute. ● set as-path — configure a filter to modify the AS path.
PAGE 245
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 246
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 247
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.
PAGE 248
Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 249
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 250
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names were up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● ● ● match match match match match match interface — redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface.
PAGE 251
Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● ● ● match match match match match match interface — redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface. ip address — redistribute routes that match an IP address. ip next-hop — redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address. ip route-source — redistribute routes that match routes advertised by other routers. route-type — redistribute routes that match a route type.
PAGE 252
match route-type To match routes based on the how the route is defined, configure a filter. Syntax match route-type {external [type-1 | type-2] | internal | level-1 | level-2 | local} To delete a match, use the no match route-type {local | internal | external [type-1 | type-2] | level-1 | level-2} command. Parameters Defaults external [type-1| type-2] Enter the keyword external then either type-1 or type-2 to match only on OSPF Type 1 routes or OSPF Type 2 routes.
PAGE 253
match tag To redistribute only routes that match a specified tag value, configure a filter. Syntax match tag tag-value To remove a match, use the no match tag command. Parameters Defaults tag-value Enter a value as the tag on which to match. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 254
Parameters Defaults map-name Enter a text string of up to 140 characters to name the route map for easy identification. permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword permit to set the route map default as permit. If you do not specify a keyword, the default is permit. deny (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword deny to set the route map default as deny. sequencenumber (OPTIONAL) Enter a number to identify the route map for editing and sequencing with other route maps.
PAGE 255
set as-path To modify the AS path for border gateway protocol (BGP) routes, configure a filter. Syntax set as-path prepend as-number [... as-number] To remove an AS-Path setting, use the no set as-path {prepend as-number | tag} command. Parameters Defaults prepend asnumber Enter the keyword prepend and then enter up to eight AS numbers to be inserted into the BGP path information. The range is from 1 to 65535. Not configured.
PAGE 256
Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 257
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.
PAGE 258
no-export Enter the keywords no-export to drop all routes containing the well-known community attribute of NO_EXPORT. All routes with the NO_EXPORT (0xFFFFFF01) community attribute must not be advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary. Defaults none Enter the keyword none to remove the community attribute from routes meeting the route map criteria. additive (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword additive to add the communities to already existing communities. Not configured.
PAGE 259
Defaults level-1-2 Enter the keyword level-1-2 to redistribute matched routes to IS-IS Level 1 and Level 2. level-2 Enter the keyword level-2 to redistribute matched routes to IS-IS Level 2. stub-area Enter the keyword stub to redistributed matched routes to OSPF stub areas. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 260
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 261
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.
PAGE 262
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Implemented the keyword internal. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 263
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. If you configure the set next-hop command, its configuration takes precedence over the neighbor next-hop-self command in the ROUTER BGP mode.
PAGE 264
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. set tag To specify a tag for redistributed routes, configure a filter. Syntax set tag tag-value To delete a setting, use the no set tag command. Parameters Defaults tag-value Enter a number as the tag. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295.
PAGE 265
set weight To add a non-RFC compliant attribute to the BGP route to assist with route selection, configure a filter. Syntax set weight weight To delete a weight specification, use the no set weight weight command. Parameters weight Enter a number as the weight used by the route meeting the route map specification. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is router-originated = 32768 and all other routes = 0.
PAGE 266
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 267
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.
PAGE 268
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To apply the AS-PATH ACL to BGP routes, use the match as-path or neighbor filter-list commands.
PAGE 269
IP Community List Commands IP community list commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. ip community-list Enter COMMUNITY-LIST mode and create an IP community-list for BGP. Syntax ip community-list comm-list-name To delete a community-list, use the no ip community-list comm-list-name command. Parameters comm-list-name Enter a text string as the name of the community-list, up to 140 characters. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 270
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 271
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 272
● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value. ● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
PAGE 273
looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands ● deny tcp — assign a filter to deny TCP packets. ● deny udp — assign a filter to deny UDP packets.
PAGE 274
Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
PAGE 275
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled.
PAGE 276
deny udp (for Extended IP ACLs) To drop user datagram protocol (UDP) packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [ttl operator] [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 277
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. Related Commands ● deny — assign a filter to deny IP traffic. ● deny tcp — assign a filter to deny TCP traffic.
PAGE 278
the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
PAGE 279
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled.
PAGE 280
Defaults threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The time interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
PAGE 281
● Use the no deny {any | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} command. Parameters Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated. with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100.
PAGE 282
● seq — configure a MAC address filter with a specified sequence number. deny (for Extended MAC ACLs) To drop packets that match the filter criteria, configure a filter.
PAGE 283
the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
PAGE 284
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms.
PAGE 285
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled.
PAGE 286
Defaults threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated. with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
PAGE 287
● Use the no permit icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. Parameters ttl Enter the keyword ttl to permit a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value.
PAGE 288
the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
PAGE 289
The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148.
PAGE 290
● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no deny {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. Parameters ttl Enter the keyword ttl to permit a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value.
PAGE 291
Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
PAGE 292
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms.
PAGE 293
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 294
● Use the no permit tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. Parameters ttl Enter the keyword ttl to permit a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value.
PAGE 295
the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
PAGE 296
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. 9.3.0.0 Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, Z9000, and MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 297
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is 5 minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON.
PAGE 298
● gt(greater than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is greater than the specified ttl value. ● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value. ● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
PAGE 299
monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG).
PAGE 300
● 20 and 21 = FTP-DATA and FTP ● 25 = SMTP ● 169 = SNMP Defaults destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count the packets. bytes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bytes to count the bytes. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
PAGE 301
monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG).
PAGE 302
Usage Information Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.
PAGE 303
host ipv6- address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
PAGE 304
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is 5 minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 305
permit icmp (for IPv6 ACLs) To allow all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter. Syntax permit icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any | host ipv6-address} [message-type] [ttl operator] [count [byte]] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 306
Usage Information Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.11(2.0P1) Added the type parameter to filter the ICMP packets based on the type and code on the S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 307
the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 308
deny udp (for IPv6 ACLs) Configure a filter to drop user datagram protocol (UDP) packets meeting the filter criteria.
PAGE 309
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, Z9000, and MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms.
PAGE 310
● ● ● ● ● operator finish (no more data from the user) push function reset the connection synchronize sequence numbers urgent field (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: ● ● ● ● ● port port fin: psh: rst: syn: urg: eq = equal to neq = not equal to gt = greater than lt = less than range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand.
PAGE 311
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.11(2.0P0) Added the established parameter on the on the S6000, S6000–ON, S6100– ON, Z9100–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.
PAGE 312
● Use the no deny icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any | host ipv6-address} command Parameters source address mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip- Enter the keyword host then the IPv6 address to specify a host IP address.
PAGE 313
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.3.0.0 Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 314
The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 315
7 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This section describes the access control list (ACL) virtual local area network (VLAN) group, and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • member vlan ip access-group show acl-vlan-group show cam-acl-vlan cam-acl-vlan show cam-usage show running config acl-vlan-group acl-vlan-group show acl-vlan-group detail description (ACL VLAN Group) member vlan Add VLAN members to an ACL VLAN group.
PAGE 316
Attaching an ACL individually to VLAN interfaces is similar to the behavior of ACL-VLAN mapping storage in CAM prior to the implementation of the ACL VLAN group functionality. ip access-group Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group. Syntax ip access-group {group name} out implicit-permit Parameters Default group-name Enter the name of the ACL VLAN group where you want the egress IP ACLs applied, up to 140 characters. out Enter the keyword out to apply the ACL to outgoing traffic.
PAGE 317
Version Description 9.3.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, Z9000 and MXL platforms Usage Information When an ACL-VLAN-Group name or the Access List Group Name contains more than 30 characters, the name is truncated in the show acl-vlan-group command output. Examples The following sample illustrates the output of the show acl-vlan-group command. NOTE: Some group names and some access list names are truncated.
PAGE 318
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.3.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, Z9000 and MXL platforms After CAM configuration for ACL VLAN groups is performed, you must reboot the system to enable the settings to be stored in nonvolatile storage. During the initialization of CAM, the chassis manager reads the NVRAM and allocates the dynamic VCAP regions.
PAGE 319
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000 platforms.
PAGE 320
Example 1: Output of the show cam-usage Command 320 Field Description CAM Partition Type of area in the CAM block that is used for ACL VLAN groups Total CAM Total amount of space in the CAM block Used CAM Amount of CAM space that is currently in use Available CAM Amount of CAM space that is free and remaining to be allocated for ACLs DellEMC#show cam-usage Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM | Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============|=============| ===
PAGE 321
Example 2: Output of the show cam-usage acl Command Example 3: Output of the show cam-usage router Command DellEMC#show cam-usage acl Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM | Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============|=============| ============== 1 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1536 | 0 | 1536 | | IN-L3 ACL | 1024 | 1 | 1023 | | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 206 | 9 | 197 | | OUT-L3 ACL | 178 | 9 | 169 | | OUT-V6 ACL | 178 | 4 | 174 2 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1536 | 0 | 1536
PAGE 322
| IN-L3 ACL | 1024 | 1 | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | OUT-L3 ACL | 178 | 9 | | | OUT-V6 ACL | 174 Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%.
PAGE 323
DellEMC#show running-config acl-vlan-group ! acl-vlan-group Test member vlan 1-100 ip access-group test in DellEMC# Test acl-vlan-group Create an ACL VLAN group. Syntax acl-vlan-group {group name} To remove an ACL VLAN group, use the no acl-vlan-group {group name} command. Parameters Default group-name Specify the name of the ACL VLAN group. The name can contain a maximum 140 characters.
PAGE 324
Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.3.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, Z9000 and MXL platforms Usage Information The output for this command displays in a line-by-line format.
PAGE 325
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is a detection protocol that provides fast forwarding path failure detection.
PAGE 326
ROUTER OSPFv3 ROUTER BGP ROUTER ISIS Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Introduced support for enabling BFD on non-default VRFs for IPv4 BGP, default, and non-default VRFs for IPv6 BGP on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, C9010, Z9500, and Z9100–ON. 9.11(2.
PAGE 327
which a neighbor belongs. The neighbors inherit only the global timer values (configured with the bfd neighbor command). You can only enable BFD for VRRP in INTERFACE command mode (vrrp bfd all-neighbors). You can enable BFD on both default and nondefault VRFs for OSPF and BGP protocols for both IPv4 and IPv6 neighbors. NOTE: The bfd all-neighbors command is applicable for both IPv4 and IPv6 BGP sessions. bfd enable (Configuration) Enable BFD on all interfaces.
PAGE 328
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 329
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/3)# bfd interval 1000 min_rx 1000 multiplier 4 role passive DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/3)# bfd protocol-liveness Enable the BFD protocol liveness feature.
PAGE 330
To disable BFD for all neighbors configured through static routes, use the no ip route bfd [vrf vrf-name] [prefix-list prefix-list-name] [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}] command. Parameters prefix-list prefix- (Optional) Enter the keyword prefix-list followed by the name of the prefix list-name list to enable or disable BFD on specific neighbors.
PAGE 331
ip ospf bfd all-neighbors Establish BFD sessions with all OSPF neighbors on a single interface or use non-default BFD session parameters. Syntax ip ospf bfd all-neighbors [disable | [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}]] To disable all BFD sessions on an OSPF interface implicitly, use the no ip ospf bfd allneighbors disable command in interface mode.. Parameters disable (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface.
PAGE 332
ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors Establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface or use non-default BFD session parameters. Syntax ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors [disable | [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}]] To disable all BFD sessions on an OSPFv3 interface implicitly, use the no ipv6 ospf bfd allneighbors disable command in interface mode.. Parameters disable (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface.
PAGE 333
ipv6 route bfd Enable BFD for all IPv6 neighbors configured through static routes. Syntax ipv6 route bfd [vrf vrf-name] [prefix-list prefix-list-name] [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}] To disable BFD for all IPv6 neighbors configured through static routes, use the no ipv6 route bfd [vrf vrf-name] [prefix-list prefix-list-name] [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}] command.
PAGE 334
To remove all BFD sessions with IS-IS neighbors discovered on this interface, use the no isis bfd all-neighbors [disable | [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}]] command. Parameters disable (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface. interval (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords interval to specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 200.
PAGE 335
Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the BGP neighbor that you want to explicitly disable for BFD sessions in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group that you want to explicitly disable for BFD sessions. Defaults None Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 336
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 337
V VT - VRRP - Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 5.1.1.1 * 6.1.1.1 * 7.1.1.1 RemoteAddr 5.1.1.2 6.1.1.2 7.1.1.2 Interface Po 30 Vl 30 Gi 1/21 State Up Up Up Rx-int 200 200 200 Tx-int 200 200 200 Mult 3 3 3 Clients O O O The following example shows the show bfd vrf neighbors command output showing the nondefault VRF.
PAGE 338
Local Addr: 6.1.1.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:a0:c9:00:00:02 Remote Addr: 6.1.1.
PAGE 339
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.
PAGE 340
9 Border Gateway Protocol BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) and the aggregation of routes and AS paths. Basically, two routers (called neighbors or peers) exchange information including full routing tables and periodically sent messages to update those routing tables.
PAGE 341
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for IPv6 VRF. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.
PAGE 342
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 343
Defaults Disabled Command Modes ● ROUTER BGP ● ROUTER BGP-address-family Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 344
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced command. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Any update without a MED attribute is the least preferred route. If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path. bgp asnotation Allows you to implement a method for AS number representation in the command line interface (CLI).
PAGE 345
router bgp 1 bgp four-octet-as-support bgp asnotation asdot DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp asnotation asdot+ DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# ex DellEMC(conf)#do show run | grep bgp router bgp 1 bgp four-octet-as-support bgp asnotation asdot+ DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp asnotation asplain DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# ex DellEMC(conf)#do show run |grep bgp router bgp 1 bgp four-octet-as-support DellEMC(conf)# Related Commands ● bgp four-octet-as-support — enable
PAGE 346
Usage Information If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path. bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax Include prefixes received from different AS paths during multipath calculation. Syntax bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax To return to the default BGP routing process, use the no bgp bestpath as-path multipathrelax command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 347
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 348
Usage Information Version Description 6.3.1.0 Introduced The MED is a 4-byte unsigned integer value and the default behavior is to assume a missing MED as 4294967295. This command causes a missing MED to be treated as 0. During path selection, paths with a lower MED are preferred over paths with a higher MED. bgp bestpath router-id ignore Do not compare router-id information for external paths during best path selection.
PAGE 349
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 350
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. When a BGP cluster contains only one route reflector, the cluster ID is the route reflector’s router ID. For redundancy, a BGP cluster may contain two or more route reflectors. Assign a cluster ID with the bgp cluster-id command.
PAGE 351
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Added support for the 4-byte format To accept 4-byte formats before entering a 4-byte AS number, configure your system. All the routers in the Confederation must be 4 byte or 2 byte identified routers. You cannot mix them. The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors.
PAGE 352
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Added support for the 4-byte format. All the routers in the Confederation must be 4 byte or 2 byte identified routers. You cannot mix them. The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors.
PAGE 353
reuse (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the reuse value, which is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is less than the reuse value, the flapping route is once again advertised (or no longer suppressed). The range is from 1 to 20000. The default is 750. suppress (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the suppress value, which is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value.
PAGE 354
To return to the default value, use the no bgp default local-preference command. Parameters Defaults value Enter a number to assign to routes as the degree of preference for those routes. When routes are compared, the higher the degree of preference or local preference value, the more the route is preferred. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 100. 100 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 355
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. Configuring or un-configuring the command brings down and brings up the BGP Route Manager, this results in tear down and re-establishment of all active sessions.
PAGE 356
If you disable the enforce-first-as command, it can be viewed using the show ip protocols command. In the event of an enfore-first-as check failure, the existing BGP session is flapped. Related Commands ● show ip bgp neighbors — view the information the BGP neighbors exchange. ● show ip protocols — view information on routing protocols. bgp fast-external-fallover Enable the fast external fallover feature, which immediately resets the BGP session if a link to a directly connected external peer fails.
PAGE 357
To disable fast external failover, use the no bgp four-octet-as-support command. Defaults Disabled (supports 2–byte format) Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 358
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 359
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. In Non-Deterministic mode, paths are compared in the order in which they arrive.
PAGE 360
To disable next-hop resolution, use the no bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 361
Usage Information Version Description 9.14(0.1) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6010–ON, and Z9100– ON. After configuring the bgp redistribute-internal command, use the clear ip bgp * command to clear all BGP sessions. If you don’t clear all BGP sessions, route redistribution happens only for new routes. NOTE: When you enable redistribution of iBGP routes into an IGP, ensure that you use route maps to control what prefixes are redistributed.
PAGE 362
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced BGP uses regular expressions (regex) to filter route information. In particular, the use of regular expressions to filter routes based on AS-PATHs and communities is common. In a large-scale configuration, filtering millions of routes based on regular expressions can be quite CPU intensive, as a regular expression evaluation involves generation and evaluation of complex finite state machines.
PAGE 363
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Peering sessions are reset when you change the router ID of a BGP router.
PAGE 364
flap-statistics Enter the keywords flap-statistics to clear the flap statistics information. ipv4 Enter the ipv4 address family to clear. ipv6 Enter the ipv6 address family to clear. peer-group Enter the peer-group to clear all members of the peer-group. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 365
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword unicast to clear the ipv4 unicast routes. ipv6 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv6 followed by the keyword unicast to clear the ipv6 unicast routes. ipv4-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format and the prefix mask in slash format (/x) to clear dampening information only that BGP neighbor.
PAGE 366
NOTE: You can use this attribute on a specific VRF to remove history routes corresponding to that VRF. You can also use this attribute to return the suppressed routes corresponding to a specific VRF to an active state. ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to clear information related only to ipv4 multicast routes. ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword unicast to clear information related only to ipv4 unicast routes.
PAGE 367
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Usage Information If you enter the clear ip bgp flap-statistics command without any parameters, all statistics are cleared. Related Commands ● show debugging — view the enabled debugging operations. ● show ip bgp flap-statistics — view the BGP flap statistics. ● undebug all — disable all debugging operations.
PAGE 368
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 369
To disable all BGP debugging, use the no debug ip bgp command. Parameters vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to debug BGP information corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: Use this attribute to debug BGP protocol operations corresponding to either a default or non-default VRF. A.B.C.D Enter the IPv4 address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. X:X:X:X::X (OPTIONAL) Enter an IPv6 address.
PAGE 370
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To view information on both incoming and outgoing routes, do not include the in and out parameters in the debugging command. The in and out parameters cancel each other; for example, if you enter the debug ip bgp in command and then enter the debug ip bgp out command, you do not see information on the incoming routes.
PAGE 371
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for the E-Series. debug ip bgp events Display information on local BGP state changes and other BGP events. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.
PAGE 372
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. debug ip bgp keepalives Display information about BGP keepalive messages. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-groupname] keepalives [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.
PAGE 373
Usage Information Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. debug ip bgp notifications Allows you to view information about BGP notifications received from neighbors. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-groupname] notifications [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.
PAGE 374
debug ip bgp soft-reconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debug. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group-name] softreconfiguration To disable, use the debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peergroup-name] soft-reconfiguration command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable soft-reconfiguration debugging on that VRF. A.B.C.
PAGE 375
debug ip bgp updates Allows you to view information about BGP updates. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-groupname] updates [in | out | prefix-list prefix-list-name] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-group-name] updates [in | out | prefix-list prefix-listname] command.
PAGE 376
Usage Information To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. default-metric Allows you to change the metric of redistributed routes to locally originated routes. Use this command with the redistribute command. Syntax default-metric number To return to the default setting, use the no default-metric command. Parameters Defaults number Enter a number as the metric to be assigned to routes from other protocols. The range is from 1 to 4294967295.
PAGE 377
To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the BGP protocol (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148.
PAGE 378
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 379
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 380
Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group. Defaults send Enter the keyword send to indicate that the system sends multiple paths to peers. receive Enter the keyword receive to indicate that the system accepts multiple paths from peers. both Enter the keyword both to indicate that the system sends and accepts multiple paths from peers. path-count Enter the number paths supported.
PAGE 381
Defaults ● seconds = 5 seconds (internal peers) ● seconds = 30 seconds (external peers) Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 382
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. neighbor allowas-in Set the number of times an AS number can occur in the AS path.
PAGE 383
Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Usage Information You cannot set this configuration for a peer that is associated with a peer group. Similarly, you cannot associate a peer to a peer group if that peer is already configured with these settings. Related Commands ● bgp four-octet-as-support — enable 4-byte support for the BGP process. neighbor default-originate Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor.
PAGE 384
When you configure a route-map for a BGP peer or peer group with the neighbor defaultoriginate command, the command checks for the existence of the route in BGP RIB. Route-map configuration on a BGP peer or peer group works only when the LOC-RIB contains at least one route. When you apply a default route to a BGP peer or peer group using the neighbor defaultoriginate command, changes to the configured default route-map are applied to the BGP peer or peer group only after a delay of 15 seconds.
PAGE 385
Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. neighbor distribute-list Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 386
neighbor ebgp-multihop Attempt and accept BGP connections to external peers on networks that are not directly connected. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} ebgp-multihop [ttl] To disallow and disconnect connections, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-groupname} ebgp-multihop command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
PAGE 387
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON and S4048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.
PAGE 388
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 389
Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.
PAGE 390
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 391
Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the router to be included in the peer group. peer-group-name Enter the name of a configured peer group. dmzlink-bw Defaults Enter the keyword dmzlink-bw to attach a link bandwidth to received routes. NOTE: If dmzlink-bw is configured for a peer, in order for the BGP peer to advertise the prefixes with dmzlink-bw attached to it, you must reset the the peer or peer-group using the clear ip bgp session command. Not configured.
PAGE 392
● show ip bgp peer-group — view BGP peers. ● show ip bgp neighbors — view BGP neighbors configurations. neighbor peer-group (creating group) Allows you to create a peer group and assign it a name. Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group To delete a peer group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group command. Parameters Defaults peer-group-name Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group. Not configured.
PAGE 393
Parameters peer-group-name Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group. limit Defaults (Optional) Enter the keyword limit to constrain the numbers of sessions for this peer-group. The range is from 2 to 256. The default is 256. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 394
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 395
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 396
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 397
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 398
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. This command enables sender-side-loopdetect for a specified BGP neighbor. BGP does not advertise a route to a peer if the AS-Path of the route already contains the peer's AS.
PAGE 399
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To configure a COMMUNITY attribute, use the set community command in ROUTE-MAP mode.
PAGE 400
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Peers that are enabled within a peer group are disabled when their peer group is disabled. The neighbor shutdown command terminates all BGP sessions on the BGP neighbor or BGP peer group. Use this command with caution as it terminates the specified BGP sessions. When a neighbor or peer group is shut down, use the show ip bgp summary command to confirm its status.
PAGE 401
You cannot set this configuration for a peer that is associated with a peer group. Similarly, you cannot associate a peer to a peer group if that peer is already configured with these settings. CAUTION: Inbound update storage is a memory-intensive operation. The entire BGP update database from the neighbor is stored in memory regardless of the inbound policy results applied on the neighbor. Related Commands ● show ip bgp neighbors — display routes received by a neighbor.
PAGE 402
Usage Information Timer values configured with the neighbor timers command override the timer values configured with any other command. When two neighbors, configured with different keepalive and holdtime values, negotiate for new values, the resulting values are as follows: ● the lower of the holdtime value is the new holdtime value, and ● whichever is the lower value; one-third of the new holdtime value, or the configured keepalive value, is the new keepalive value.
PAGE 403
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 404
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 405
● ● ● ● set set set set metric next-hop origin weight If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 406
network backdoor Specify this IGP route as the preferred route. Syntax network ip-address mask backdoor To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask backdoor command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network. mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, /24). The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 407
Command Modes EXTENDED COMMUNITY LIST Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 408
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.
PAGE 409
route-map map- name Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route map. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 410
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 411
Use the no shutdown address-family-ipv4–unicast command to enable all the configured BGP neighbors corresponding to the multicast IPv4 address families. Command Modes ROUTER BGP CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced on the S-Series, Z-Series, MXL, and IOM. You can use this command to disable all the configured BGP neighbors corresponding to the multicast IPv4 address families. This command is global for all VRFs.
PAGE 412
set extcommunity bandwidth Enables you to set extended community bandwidth. Syntax set extcommunity bandwidth To disable extended community bandwidth, enter the no set extcommunity bandwidth command. Parameters Defaults bandwidth Enter the keyword bandwidth to enable extended community bandwidth. The range is from 0 to 102400. N/A Command Modes ROUTER MAP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 413
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 414
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 415
longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords longer-prefixes to view all routes with a common prefix. cluster-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cluster-list then the cluster-ID to display the routes matching the cluster. cluster-id community communitynumber community-list community-listname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword community then the community–number to display the routes matching the communities.
PAGE 416
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Added the add-path option to the S4810. Output on the S4810 shows the ADDPATH parameters. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 417
Received from : 1.1.1.2 (3.3.3.1) Best AS_PATH : Next-Hop : 1.1.1.2, Cost : 0 Origin IGP, Metric 0, LocalPref Extended Communities : DMZ-Link Bw: 2000 kbytes* 100, Weight 0, internal Following is the example for displaying all the received routes from all IPv4 neighbors: DellEMC# show ip bgp vrf test ipv4 unicast neighbors all received-routes BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 BGP local router ID is 1.1.1.
PAGE 418
● show ip bgp cluster-list — view BGP neighbors in a specific cluster. ● show ip bgp community — view information on all routes with Community attributes or view specific BGP community groups. ● show ip bgp community-list — view routes that a specific community list affects. ● show ip bgp dampened-paths — view BGP routes that are dampened (non-active). ● show ip bgp extcommunity-list — view information on all routes with Extended Community attributes.
PAGE 419
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The following describes the show ip bgp cluster-list command shown in the following example.
PAGE 420
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 followed by the keyword unicast to view information related only to ipv4 unicast routes. ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to view information related only to ipv4 multicast routes. ipv6 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv6 followed by the keyword unicast to view information related only to ipv6 unicast routes.
PAGE 421
Usage Information To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command. The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found. The show ip bgp community command without any parameters lists BGP routes with at least one BGP community attribute and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp command output. The following describes the show ip bgp community command shown in the following example.
PAGE 422
community-listname Enter the name of a configured IP community list (maximum 140 characters). exact-match Enter the keyword for an exact match of the communities. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 423
n - network, D - denied, S - stale Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path *> 55.0.0.0/24 172.16.0.2 0 200 i DellEMC# show ip bgp 55.0.0.0/24 BGP routing table entry for 55.0.0.0/24 Paths: (1 available, table Default-IP-Routing-Table.) Not advertised to any peer Received from : 172.16.0.2 (172.16.0.2) AS_PATH : 200 Best Next-Hop : 172.16.0.
PAGE 424
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To determine a BGP session flap, both a route-down event and a subsequent route-up event corresponding to a single route are considered. As a result, a flap event is penalized only one time during the route-down event.
PAGE 425
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 426
AfMPathRttP 0x41a0d700 MpathCtxAddr 1101111140 : MpathCtxAddrlen 255 : AfEorSet 0x41a19f98 : NumDfrdPfx 0 AfActPeerHd 0x41a1a3a4 : AfExtDist 1101112312 : AfIntDist 200 : AfLocDist 200 AfNumRRc 0 : AfRR 0 : AfNetRttP 0x41a0d300 : AfNetCtxAddr 1101112392 : AfNetCtxAddrlen 255 AfNwCtxAddr 1101112443 : AfNwCtxAddrlen 255 : AfNetBKDrRttP 0x41a0d500 : AfNetBKDRCnt 0 : AfDampHLife 0 AfDampReuse 0 : AfDampSupp 0 : AfDampMaxHld 0 : AfDampCeiling 0 : AfDampRmapP DellEMC# show ip bgp extcommunity-list View informatio
PAGE 427
Usage Information Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command. The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found. The show ip bgp community command without any parameters lists BGP routes with at least one BGP community attribute and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp command output.
PAGE 428
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 429
show ip bgp flap-statistics View flap statistics on BGP routes. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] flap-statistics [ip-address [mask]] [filter-list as-path-name] [regexp regular-expression] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF to view flap statistics on BGP routes corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 430
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 431
Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 432
* * 9.2.0.0/16 * --More-- 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.60 63.114.8.34 0 18508 209 3549 i 0 18508 209 701 i 0 18508 209 701 i DellEMC# show ip bgp vrf testinconsistent-as BGP table version is 11, local router ID is 66.66.77.77 Status codes: s suppressed, S stale, d dampened, h history, * valid, > best Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed n - network, D - denied, S - stale Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network Next Hop Metric *>n 11.11.11.11/32 0.0.0.
PAGE 433
all {received(OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords all {received-routes} then either the routes [ network network address alone (in dotted decimal format) or the network address along [ network-mask ]} with the network mask (in slash prefix format) to view all the information received from neighbors. NOTE: Configure the neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound command prior to viewing all the information received from the neighbors.
PAGE 434
The Lines Beginning with: Description BGP neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address and its AS number. The last phrase in the line indicates whether the link between the BGP router and its neighbor is an external or internal one. If they are located in the same AS, the link is internal; otherwise the link is external. BGP version Displays the BGP version (always version 4) and the remote router ID.
PAGE 435
Hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 50 messages, 0 in queue 1 opens, 0 notifications, 34 updates 15 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Sent 18 messages, 0 in queue 1 opens, 0 notifications, 0 updates 16 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Route refresh request: received 0, sent messages 1 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(
PAGE 436
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.
PAGE 437
● ? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either zero or one sequences). NOTE: Enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the ? regular expression. [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns. ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element. { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count. ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If you use the caret at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified.
PAGE 438
Example DellEMC# show ip bgp paths ? community Display community information extcommunity Display extended community information regexp Display path information based on a regular expression | Pipe through a command DellEMC#show ip bgp paths Total 2 Paths Refcount Metric Path 1 0 200 i 1 0 200 i DellEMC# show ip bgp paths community View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database.
PAGE 439
Example Field Description Hash Displays the hash bucket where the path attribute is stored. Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using these communities. Community Displays the community attributes in this BGP path. DellEMC# show ip bgp paths community Total 2 communities Refcount Community 1 NO-ADVERTISE 1 200:1 1000:1 3000:1 DellEMC# show ip bgp peer-group Allows you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group.
PAGE 440
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. Introduced on S6000–ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Added the add-path option to the S4810. Output on the S4810 shows the ADDPATH parameters. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 441
show ip bgp regexp Display the subset of the BGP routing tables matching the regular expressions specified. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] regexp regular-expression [character] vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to view the subset of BGP routing tables that match the regular expression specified on that VRF.
PAGE 442
Usage Information Example Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The following describes the show ip bgp regexp command shown in the following example. Field Description Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route. Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then non-BGP routes exist in the router’s routing table. Metric Displays the BGP router’s metric, if assigned.
PAGE 443
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 444
Field Description Neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address. AS Displays the AS number of the neighbor. MsgRcvd Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor received. MsgSent Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor sent. TblVer Displays the version of the BGP table that was sent to that neighbor. InQ Displays the number of messages from that neighbor waiting to be processed. OutQ Displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to that neighbor.
PAGE 445
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
PAGE 446
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 447
MBGP Commands Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems (ASs). Dell EMC Networking OS MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858. BGPv4 is supported in the following: Dell EMC Networking OS Version Platform Support 7.8.1.0, MBGP for IPv4 Multicast Only S-Series debug ip bgp dampening View information on routes being dampened.
PAGE 448
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for the E-Series. distance bgp Configure three administrative distances for routes. Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance To return to default values, use the no distance bgp command.
PAGE 449
show ip bgp dampened-paths View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active). Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] dampened-paths vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF to view routes that are affected by a specific community list corresponding to that VRF. ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to view information related only to ipv4 multicast routes.
PAGE 450
Example Field Description Network Displays the network ID to which the route is dampened. From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the dampened route. Reuse Displays the hour:minutes:seconds until the dampened route is available. Path Lists all the ASs the dampened route passed through to reach the destination network. DellEMC# show ip bgp dampened-paths BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 BGP local router ID is 192.168.11.
PAGE 451
Command Modes ROUTE MAP (config-route-map) Command History Usage Information Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z-9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 452
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 453
Example Field Description Hash Displays the hash bucket where the path attribute is stored. Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using these extended communities. Community Displays the extended community attributes in this BGP path. DellEMC# show ip bgp paths extcommunity Total 1 Extended Communities Address 0x41d57024 Hash Refcount Extended Community 12272 1 RT:7:200 SoO:5:300 SoO:0.0.0.3:1285 DellEMC# show ip extcommunity-list Display the IP extended community list.
PAGE 454
IPv6 BGP Commands IPv6 border gateway protocol (IPv6 BGP) is supported on the platform. BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between Autonomous Systems (AS). Basically, two routers (called neighbors or peers) exchange information including full routing tables and periodically send messages to update those routing tables.
PAGE 455
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debugging for IPv6 unicast routes. Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peergroup-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration command. Parameters ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor on which you want to enable softreconfiguration debugging.
PAGE 456
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound Enable a BGP soft-reconfiguration and start storing updates for inbound IPv6 unicast routes.
PAGE 457
prefix-list name Enter the name of the prefix list. NOTE: There is a 140-character limit for prefix list names. summary Display a summary of RPF routes. Command Modes EXEC Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.
PAGE 458
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) You can use content addressable memory (CAM) commands to configure the amount of memory allocated to CAM memory partitions. NOTE: Not all CAM commands are supported on all platforms. Be sure to note the platform when looking for a command. NOTE: If you are using these features for the first time, contact Dell EMC Networking Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for guidance.
PAGE 459
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● IPV6Acl : 0 IPV4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl :0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 l2acl number Enter the keyword l2acl and then the number of l2acl blocks. The range is from 1 to 8. ipv4acl number Enter the keyword ipv4acl and then the number of FP blocks for IPv4 ACL. The range is from 0 to 8.
PAGE 460
fcoeacl number Enter the keyword fcoeacl and then the number of FP blocks for FCOE ACL. The range is from 0 to 6. Iscsioptacl Enter the keyword iscsioptacl and then the number of FP blocks for iSCSI optimization ACL. The range is from 0 to 2. number ipv4mirracl Enter the ipv4mirracl keyword and then the number of FP blocks for IPv4 mirror ACL. The range is from 0 to 8. You cannot use the ipv4mirracl and ipv4udfmirracl commands at the same time.
PAGE 461
The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires three blocks; these blocks cannot be reallocated. Only number of blocks can be configured by the user . If allocation values are not entered for the CAM regions, the value is 0. If you enable BMP, to perform a reload on the chassis to upgrade any configuration changes that have changed the NVRAM content, use the command reload conditional nvram-cfg-change. cam-acl-egress Allocate CAM for egress ACLs.
PAGE 462
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0. Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 463
Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.14.1.0 Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13.0.0 Introduced on the MXL, FN IOM, S5000, S4048-ON, S6000, S6000-ON, S3048ON, S3100 Series, C9010, S4048T-ON, Z9500, Z9100-ON, S6100-ON, S6010-ON. The no cam-threshold command will set the CAM threshold to 90 percent and silence period to 0. The CAM threshold and silence period configuration is applicable only for Ingress L2, IPv4, IPv6 and Egress L2, IPv4, and IPv6 ACL CAM groups.
PAGE 464
Example DellEMC# show cam-acl -- Chassis Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 4 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 -- stack-unit 1 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 4 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4p
PAGE 465
IPV6(IPV4QOS) Triple Wide Regions: VmanQos, Openflow, ipv4udfmirracl L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl* : 2 Ipv4Qos* : 0 L2Qos : 2 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 1 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 EtsAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl : 0 ipv4udfmirracl: 0 ipv4mirracl : 0 * - shared regions show cam-usage Display the amount of memory space used and available in each CAM partition (including Layer 2 ACL, Layer 3 ACL, and IPv4Flow) Syntax Parameters Defaults show
PAGE 466
Table 3.
PAGE 467
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced. This command applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 CAM Profiles, but is best used when verifying QoS optimization for IPv6 ACLs. QoS Optimization for IPv6 ACLs does not impact the CAM usage for applying a policy on a single (or the first of several) interfaces.
PAGE 468
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. The CoPP filters prevent traffic that is not identified as legitimate from reaching the control plane, and rate-limit traffic to an acceptable level.
PAGE 469
service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues Apply a policy map for the system to rate limit control traffic on a per-queue basis. Syntax Parameters Defaults service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues policy-name policy-name Enter the service-policy name, using a string up to 32 characters. Not configured. Command Modes CONTROL-PLANE-CPUQOS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 470
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.
PAGE 471
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S–Series. Use this command to add the IPv4 catch-all route (0.0.0.0/0) in the LPM route forwarding table if it was deleted using the no ip unknown-unicast command previously. This will be the default configuration after reload.
PAGE 472
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 473
Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 474
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 475
LLDP GVRP STP ISIS DellEMC# any 01:80:c2:00:00:21 01:80:c2:00:00:00 01:80:c2:00:00:14/15 09:00:2b:00:00:04/05 0x88cc any any any any Q8 Q8 Q7 Q9 Q9 CP CP CP CP CP _ _ _ _ Control Plane Policing (CoPP) 475
PAGE 476
12 Debugging and Diagnostics The basic debugging and diagnostic commands are supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands Offline Diagnostic Commands Hardware Commands Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands The following section describes the diagnostics and monitoring commands. For similar commands, refer to the Control and Monitoring chapter. logging coredump stack-unit Enable coredump on a stack.
PAGE 477
not reachable, the application coredump is aborted. Dell EMC Networking OS completes the coredump process and wait until the upload is complete before rebooting the system. Offline Diagnostic Commands The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. While tests are running, Dell EMC Networking OS results are saved as a text file (TestReport-SU-X.txt) in the flash directory. This show file command is available only on master and standby.
PAGE 478
no-reboot Defaults Enter the keyword no-reboot to prevent the system from rebooting after the test. To bring the stack unit to online state, use the online stack-unit stack-unit-number command. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148.
PAGE 479
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Added a warning message to the off-line diagnostic. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. You cannot enter this command on a Master or Standby unit. The system reboots when the off-line diagnostics complete. This reboot is an automatic process.
PAGE 480
Warning - Diagnostic execution will cause stack-unit to reboot after completion of diags. Proceed with Offline-Diags [confirm yes/no]:y Hardware Commands These commands display information from a hardware sub-component or ASIC. clear hardware stack-unit Clear statistics from selected hardware components.
PAGE 481
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. ● show hardware stack-unit — display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member. clear hardware system-flow Clear system-flow statistics from selected hardware components.
PAGE 482
Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 483
show hardware mac Display MAC ACL entries for the specified stack-unit, port-pipe and pipeline ID. Syntax Parameters Defaults show hardware mac {eg-acl | in-acl} stack-unit id port-set 0–0 eg-acl | in-acl Enter either the keyword eg-acl or the keyword in-acl to select between ingress or egress ACL data. stack- unit id Enter the keyword stack-unit to select the stack unit ID.
PAGE 484
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 485
stats [detail] | register} TI monitor Defaults Enter the unit keyword to show information regarding the TI register. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example (DataPlane) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 486
Example (PartyBus) Example (Drops Unit) Example (PortStats) Example (Register) 486 DellEMC# show hardware stack-unit 1 cpu party-bus statistics Input Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 dropped, 0 errors Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 errors DellEMC# sh hard stack-unit 1 drops unit 0 PortNumber Ingress Drops IngMac Drops Total Mmu Drops 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 EgMac Drops Egress Drops 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DellEMC# DellEMC# show hardware stack-unit 1 unit 0 port-stats ena/ speed/ link auto STP
PAGE 487
0x0061204c ASFPORTSPEED.ge18 = 0x00000000 0x0061304c ASFPORTSPEED.ge19 = 0x00000000 0x0061404c ASFPORTSPEED.ge20 = 0x00000000 0x0061504c ASFPORTSPEED.ge21 = 0x00000000 0x0061604c ASFPORTSPEED.ge22 = 0x00000000 0x0061704c ASFPORTSPEED.ge23 = 0x00000005 0x0061804c ASFPORTSPEED.hg0 = 0x00000007 0x0061904c ASFPORTSPEED.hg1 = 0x00000007 0x0061a04c ASFPORTSPEED.hg2 = 0x00000000 0x0061b04c ASFPORTSPEED.hg3 = 0x00000000 0x0061c04c ASFPORTSPEED.cpu0 = 0x00000000 0x00780000 AUX_ARB_CONTROL.
PAGE 488
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX 488 - 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/Frame Counter Unicast Frame Counter Multicast Frame Counter Broadcast Frame Counter Byte Counter Control Frame Counter Pause Control Frame Counter Oversized Frame C
PAGE 489
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - Debug Debug Debug Debug Debug Debug Debug Debug Debug Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 --------------------unit: 0 port: 61 (interface Gi 1/60) Description RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX - IPV4 L3 Unicast Frame Counter IPV4 L3 Routed Multicast Packets IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter IPV6
PAGE 490
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX Example (Details) - 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/Frame Counter Unicast Frame Counter Multicast Frame Counter Broadcast Frame Counter Byte Counter Control Frame Counter Pause Control Frame Counter Oversized Frame Counter Jabbe
PAGE 491
The linkStatus of Front End Port 5 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 6 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 7 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 8 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 9 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 10 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 11 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 12 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 13 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 14 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 15 is FALSE The linkStatus of Fron
PAGE 492
● show system — display the current status of all the stack members or a specific member. show hardware buffer interface Display buffer statistics for a specific interface. Syntax show hardware buffer interface interface{priority-group { id | all } | queue { id| all} ] buffer-info Parameters interface interface Enter any of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 493
----- Buffer Stats for Interface Gi 1/1 Queue Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Gi 1/1 Queue Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Gi 1/1 Queue Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Gi 1/1 Queue Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Pack
PAGE 494
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 495
show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot Displays buffer statistics tracking resource information for a specific interface. Syntax Parameters show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource {headroom-pool [detail] | service-pool [detail] interface interface {{priority-group {id | all} | queue ucast {id | all} mcast {id | all} | all} [detail]} headroom-pool detail Enter the keyword headroom-pool followed by the keyword detail to view detailed information about the headroom pool usage.
PAGE 496
Parameters stack-unit stack- Unique ID of the stack unit to select a particular stack member and then enter one unit-number of the following command options to display a collection of data based on the option entered. buffer-statssnapshot unit number buffer-info Display the historical snapshot of buffer statistical values unit Enter the keyword unit along with a port-pipe number. The range is from 0 to 0.
PAGE 497
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 4 3 0-2,5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 show hardware system-flow Display Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe. Syntax Parameters Defaults show hardware system-flow stack-unit id port-set number [counters] stack-unit id Enter the keywords stack-unit to select a stack member ID. port-set number [counters] Enter the keywords port-set with a port-pipe number. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword counters for the specified port-pipe.
PAGE 498
2038 OSPF1 STUB 2037 OSPF2 STUB 2036 VRRP STUB 2035 L2_DST_HIT+BC MAC+VLAN 4095 2034 L2_DST_HIT+BC MAC 2033 Catch all 384 OSPF[224.0.0.5] Packets 383 OSPF[224.0.0.
PAGE 499
action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)}, !--------- output truncated -----------------! show hardware vlan-counters Display the hardware VLAN statistics. Syntax Parameters Defaults show hardware vlan-counters vlan-id vlan-id Enter the interface VLAN number. The range is from 1 to 4094. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 500
● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.
PAGE 501
Rx VLAN Drops --- Ingress MAC counters--Ingress FCSDrops Ingress MTUExceeds --- MMU Drops --Ingress MMU Drops HOL DROPS(TOTAL) HOL DROPS on COS0 HOL DROPS on COS1 HOL DROPS on COS2 HOL DROPS on COS3 HOL DROPS on COS4 HOL DROPS on COS5 HOL DROPS on COS6 HOL DROPS on COS7 HOL DROPS on COS8 HOL DROPS on COS9 HOL DROPS on COS10 HOL DROPS on COS11 HOL DROPS on COS12 HOL DROPS on COS13 HOL DROPS on COS14 HOL DROPS on COS15 HOL DROPS on COS16 HOL DROPS on COS17 TxPurge CellErr Aged Drops --- Egress MAC counters--E
PAGE 502
13 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on the configuration policies the network administrators determine.
PAGE 503
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Press Enter after the clear ip dhcp binding command clears all the IPs from the binding table. debug ip dhcp server Display Dell OS debugging messages for DHCP.
PAGE 504
debug ipv6 dhcp To enable debug logs for DHCPv6 relay agent transactions. Syntax debug ipv6 dhcp To disable the debug logs for dhcpv6 relay agent transactions, use the debug ipv6 dhcp command. Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 505
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. disable Disable the DHCP server. Syntax disable DHCP Server is disabled by default. To enable the system to be a DHCP server, use the no disable command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 506
Parameters Defaults address Enter a list of DNS servers that may service clients on the subnet. You may list up to eight servers, in order of preference. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON.
PAGE 507
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. excluded-address Prevent the server from leasing an address or range of addresses in the pool.
PAGE 508
hardware-address For manual configurations, specify the client hardware address. Syntax hardware-address address Parameters Defaults address Enter the hardware address of the client. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 509
Usage Information When you upgrade the Dell EMC Networking OS from an earlier version to 9.14.1.3 or later, the system converts the DHCP CONFIGURATION host command in the running configuration to the hostaddress command. If you downgrade the Dell EMC Networking OS from version 9.14.1.3 or later to an earlier version, any existing host-address command is deleted from the running configuration. If you want to create manual DHCP bindings, use the host command. ip dhcp server Enable DHCP server globally.
PAGE 510
Defaults 24 hours Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 511
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. netbios-node-type Specify the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client. Dell EMC Networking recommends specifying clients as hybrid.
PAGE 512
network Specify the range of addresses in an address pool. Syntax network network /prefix-length Parameters Defaults network/ prefixlength Specify a range of addresses. Prefix-length range is from 17 to 31. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 513
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 514
show ip dhcp configuration Display the DHCP configuration. Syntax show ip dhcp configuration [global | pool name] Parameters Defaults pool name Display the configuration for a DHCP pool. global Display the DHCP configuration for the entire system. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 515
show ip dhcp conflict Display the address conflict log. Syntax Parameters Defaults show ip dhcp conflict address address Display a particular conflict log entry. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 516
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Commands to Configure Secure DHCP DHCP, as defined by RFC 2131, provides no authentication or security mechanisms.
PAGE 517
Related Commands ● arp inspection-trust — specify a port as trusted so that ARP frames are not validated against the binding table. arp inspection-limit Configure dynamic ARP inspection rate-limit to verify the rate of ARP packet received in a port on a specific interval. Syntax arp inspection-limit {rate pps [interval seconds]} Defaults None Command Modes INTERFACE CONFIGURATION Parameters Command History rate pps Enter the keyword rate then the packet per second (pps) value.
PAGE 518
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ● arp inspection — enable dynamic ARP inspection on a VLAN. clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the DHCP binding table. Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping {binding | source-address-validation discardcounters [interface interface]} Parameters binding Clears the binding table.
PAGE 519
Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 520
ip dhcp relay Enable Option 82. Syntax ip dhcp relay information-option [remote-id {port | hostname:port | mac} | circuit-d {port | hostname:port | mac} | trust-downstream] Parameters Defaults remote-id Enter the keyword remote-id to configure the system to enable the remote-id string in option-82. remote-id port Enter the keywords remote-id port to configure the port as the remote id in option–82.
PAGE 521
ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP snooping globally. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
PAGE 522
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan Enable ipv6 DHCP Snooping on VLAN or range of VLANs.
PAGE 523
interface type Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface to which the host is connected: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. lease time Defaults Enter the keyword lease then the amount of time the IP address are leased. The range is from 1 to 4294967295.
PAGE 524
IPv6 DHCP Snooping Binding Create a static DHCP snooping binding entry in the snooping database. Syntax [no] ipv6 dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ipv6 ipv6address interface interface-type | interface-number lease value To delete the DHCP snooping binding entry from DHCP snooping database, use the [no] ipv6 dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ipv6 ipv6-address interface interface-type | interface-number lease valuecommand.
PAGE 525
Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 526
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ip dhcp snooping database renew Renew the binding table. Syntax ip dhcp snooping database renew Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 527
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ip dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted.
PAGE 528
To disable dhcp snooping trusted capability on this interface, use the no ipv6 dhcp snooping trust command. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 529
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Added the keyword ipmac. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Allocate at least one FP block to ipmacacl before you can enable IP+MAC Source Address Validation and SAV with VLAN option. 1. Use the cam-acl l2acl command from CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Save the running-config to the startup-config. 3. Reload the system.
PAGE 530
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.
PAGE 531
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the C9010, MXL, FN IOM, S3100 series, S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. ● ipv6 dhcp relay source-interface— Configure DHCP relay source IPv6 interface.
PAGE 532
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address Validate a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 533
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ip helper-address Configures the destination broadcast address or the host address for DHCP server requests. Syntax ip helper-address [vrf vrf-name] ip-address To disable the destination broadcast address or the host address for DHCP server requests, use the ip helper-address [vrf vrf-name] ip-address command.
PAGE 534
ipv6-address Default Enter the keywordipv6–address through which the server address can be reached. Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Enhanced to support non-default VRF configuration for DHCPv6 helper address. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 535
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 536
ipmac-vlan sav access-list on Port-channel 10 on stack-unit 3 Total cam count 5 permit host 0.0.0.0 host 00:00:00:00:00:00 count (0 packets) permit vlan 10 host 1.1.1.1 host 00:00:00:00:01:01 count (0 packets) permit vlan 10 host 1.1.1.2 host 00:00:00:00:01:02 count (0 packets) permit vlan 10 host 1.1.1.3 host 00:00:00:00:01:03 count (0 packets) NOTE: The output for port-channel interfaces does not display the physical interface.
PAGE 537
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. DellEMC# show ipv6 dhcp snooping IPv6 DHCP Snooping IPv6 DHCP Snooping Mac Verification : Enabled. : Disabled.
PAGE 538
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series. Use this command to associate the system with one or more DNS servers.
PAGE 539
Usage Information Example Use this command to configure a domain name corresponding to a VRF. This domain is appended to the in complete DNS requests corresponding to the specified VRF. DellEMC(conf)# ip domain-name vrf jay dell.com ip domain-list Adds a domain name to the DNS list. This domain name is appended to incomplete host names in DNS requests corresponding to a specific VRF.
PAGE 540
ip host Configures a mapping between the host name server and the IP address for a specific VRF. This mapping information is used by the name-to-IP address table to resolve host names. Syntax ip host [vrf vrf-name] name ip-address To undo the host name server to IP address mapping for VRFs, use the no ip host [vrf vrfname] name ip-address command.
PAGE 541
Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series.
PAGE 542
14 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Equal cost multi-path (ECMP) supports multiple "best paths" in next-hop packet forwarding to a destination device. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • ecmp-group hash-algorithm hash-algorithm ecmp hash-algorithm seed ip ecmp-group ip ecmp weighted link-bundle-monitor enable link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold show config show link-bundle distribution ecmp-group Provides a mechanism to monitor traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle.
PAGE 543
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 544
● xor8: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR8 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor8 ● xor16: Use CR16 — 16 bit XOR hg { crc16 | crc16cc | crc32MSB | crc32LSB | xor1 | xor2 | xor4 | xor8 | xor16 } stackunit stack-unitnumber | portset port-pipe Enter the keyword hg then one of the following options: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● crc16: Use CRC16_BISYNC — 16 bit CRC16-bisync polynomial (default) crc16cc: Use CRC16_CCITT — 16 bit CRC16 using CRC16-CCITT polynomial crc32MSB: Use CRC32_UPPER — MSB 16 bits of compute
PAGE 545
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Added the nh-ecmp option. 7.7.1.1 Added the nh-ecmp option.
PAGE 546
hash-algorithm ecmp Change the hash algorithm used to distribute traffic flows across an ECMP (equal-cost multipath routing) group. Term heading Description heading Syntax hash-algorithm ecmp {crc-upper} | {dest-ip} | {lsb} To return to the default hash algorithm, use the no hash-algorithm ecmp command. Parameters Defaults crc-upper Uses the upper 32 bits of the key for the hash computation. The default is crclower. dest-ip Uses the destination IP for ECMP hashing. The default is enabled.
PAGE 547
Parameters Defaults seed value Enter the keyword seed then the seed value. The range is from 0 to 2,147,483,646. stack–unit slot/ port Enter the keyword stack-unit then the slot/port number. port-set number Enter the keyword port-set then the port-pipe number. The value is 0. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 548
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 549
Example DellEMC(conf)# ip ecmp ? weighted Enables Weighted ECMP DellEMC(conf)# ip ecmp weighted DellEMC(conf)#do show running-config | grep ecmp ip ecmp weighted DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)# no ip ecmp ? weighted Disables Weighted ECMP DellEMC(conf)# no ip ecmp weighted DellEMC(conf)# do show running-config | grep ecmp link-bundle-monitor enable Provides a mechanism to enable monitoring of traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle.
PAGE 550
Parameters percent Indicate the threshold value when traffic distribution starts being monitored on an ECMP link bundle. The range is from 1 to 90%. The default is 60%. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 551
show link-bundle distribution Display the link-bundle distribution for the interfaces in the bundle, type of bundle (LAG or ECMP), and the most recently calculated interface utilization (either bytes per second rate or maximum rate) for each interface. Syntax show link-bundle-distribution Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 552
15 FIPS Cryptography To configure federal information processing standards (FIPS) cryptography, use the following commands: Topics: • • • • fips mode enable show fips status show ip ssh ssh fips mode enable Enable the FIPS cryptography mode on the platform. Syntax [no] fips mode enable To disable the FIPS cryptography mode, use the no fips mode enable command. Default Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 553
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. DellEMC# show fips status FIPS Mode : Disabled DellEMC# DellEMC#show fips status FIPS Mode : Enabled DellEMC# show ip ssh Display information about established SSH sessions.
PAGE 554
Example Related Commands Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v2. SSH server vrf : default. SSH server ciphers : aes256-ctr,aes256-cbc,aes192-ctr,aes192cbc,aes128-ctr,aes128-cbc,3des-cbc. SSH server macs : hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96,hmacmd5,hmac-md5-96.
PAGE 555
-m HMAC algorithm Enter one of the following HMAC algorithms to use. (For v2 clients only.): Without the FIPS mode enabled: ● ● ● ● hmac-shal-96: Force ssh to use the hmac-sha1–96 HMAC algorithm. hmac-sha1: Force ssh to use the hmac-sha1 HMAC algorithm. hmac-md5–96: Force ssh to use the hmac-md5–96 HMAC algorithm. hmac-md5: Force ssh to use the hmac-md5 HMAC algorithm. With the FIPS mode enabled: ● ● ● ● ● -p port-number hmac-sha2-256: Force ssh to use the hmac-sha2-256 HMAC algorithm.
PAGE 556
-v SSH protocol version DellEMC# ssh 10.10.10.10 -c ? 3des-cbc Force ssh to use 3des-cbc encryption cipher aes128-cbc Force ssh to use aes128-cbc encryption cipher aes192-cbc Force ssh to use aes192-cbc encryption cipher aes256-cbc Force ssh to use aes256-cbc encryption cipher aes128-ctr Force ssh to use aes128-ctr encryption cipher aes192-ctr Force ssh to use aes192-ctr encryption cipher aes256-ctr Force ssh to use aes256-ctr encryption cipher DellEMC# ssh 10.10.10.
PAGE 557
16 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP is a proprietary protocol for that offers fast convergence in a Layer 2 network without having to run the spanning tree protocol (STP). The resilient ring protocol is an efficient protocol that transmits a high-speed token across a ring to verify the link status. All the intelligence is contained in the master node with practically no intelligence required of the transit mode. Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FRRP is media- and speed-independent.
PAGE 558
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 559
count number Defaults Enter the keyword count then the number of debug outputs. The range is from 1 to 65534. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 560
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. disable Disable the resilient ring protocol.
PAGE 561
interface Configure the primary, secondary, and control-vlan interfaces. Syntax interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id} To return to the default, use the no interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id} command.
PAGE 562
Version Description 7.4.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information This command causes the Ring Manager to take ownership of the two ports after IFM validates the configuration. Ownership is relinquished for a port only when the interface does not play a part in any control VLAN, that is, the interface does not belong to any ring. Related Commands ● show frrp — display the Resilient Ring Protocol configuration information. member-vlan Specify the member VLAN identification numbers.
PAGE 563
mode Set the Master or Transit mode of the ring. Syntax mode {master | transit} To reset the mode, use the no mode {master | transit} command. Parameters Defaults master Enter the keyword master to set the Ring node to Master mode. transit Enter the keywordtransit to set the Ring node to Transit mode. Mode None Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 564
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 565
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. Executing this command without the optional ring-id command clears the statistics counters on all the available rings. Dell EMC Networking OS requires a command line confirmation before the command executes.
PAGE 566
Usage Information Version Description 7.4.1.0 Introduced. Executing this command without the optional ring-id command clears the statistics counters on all the available rings. Dell EMC Networking OS requires a command line confirmation before the command executes.
PAGE 567
Related Commands ● protocol frrp — enter the resilient ring protocol and designate a ring identification. timer Set the hello interval or dead interval for the Ring control packets. Syntax timer {hello-interval milliseconds}| {dead-interval milliseconds} To remove the timer, use the no timer {hello-interval [milliseconds]}| {deadinterval milliseconds} command.
PAGE 568
Usage Information 568 The hello interval command is the interval at which ring frames are generated from the primary interface of the master node. The dead interval command is the time that elapses before a time-out occurs.
PAGE 569
17 GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) The Dell EMC Networking operating system supports the basic GVRP commands on the Dell EMC Networking OS. The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) mechanism allows the configuration of a GARP participant to propagate through a network quickly. A GARP participant registers or de-registers its attributes with other participants by making or withdrawing declarations of attributes.
PAGE 570
• • • • show show show show config garp timers gvrp gvrp statistics clear gvrp statistics Clear GVRP statistics on an interface. Syntax clear gvrp statistics interface interface Parameters interface interface Defaults Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 571
debug gvrp Enable debugging on GVRP. Syntax debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} To disable debugging, use the no debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} command. Parameters config Enter the keyword config to enable debugging on the GVRP configuration. event Enter the keyword event to enable debugging on the JOIN/LEAVE events.
PAGE 572
To re-enable GVRP, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 573
NOTE: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100. Defaults As above. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON.
PAGE 574
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 575
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 576
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series ● disable — globally disable GVRP. show config Display the global GVRP configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 577
Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 578
Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 579
● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. summary Defaults Enter the keyword summary to display just a summary of the GVRP statistics. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 580
Leave All Transmitted: 41 Invalid Messages/Attributes skipped: 0 Failed Registrations: 0 DellEMC# Related Commands 580 ● show gvrp — display the GVRP configuration.
PAGE 581
18 High Availability (HA) High availability (HA) in the Dell EMC Networking OS is the configuration synchronization to minimize recovery time in the event of a route processor module (RPM) failure. In general, a protocol is defined as “hitless” in the context of an RPM failure/failover and not failures of a line card, SFM, or power module. A protocol is defined as hitless if an RPM failover has no impact on the protocol. You must specifically enable some protocols for HA.
PAGE 582
Usage Information Enabling this command keeps the failed RPM in the failed state. If there are two RPMs in the system, enabling this command prevents the failed RPM from becoming a working Standby RPM. If there is only one RPM in the system, the failed RPM does not recover and affects the system. redundancy force-failover Force the secondary stack unit to become the primary stack unit.
PAGE 583
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 584
Field Description PEER RPM Status Displays the state of the second RPM, if present RPM Redundancy Displays the following information: Configuration ● which RPM is the preferred Primary on next boot (the redundancy primary command) ● the data sync method configured (the redundancy synchronize command) ● the failover type (you cannot change this type; it is software-dependent). Hot Failover means that the running configuration and routing table are applied on secondary RPM.
PAGE 585
Last failover Reason: User request -- Last Data Block Sync Record: ------------------------------------------------Line Card Config: succeeded Jul 13 2007 21:28:53 Start-up Config: succeeded Jul 13 2007 21:28:53 SFM Config State: succeeded Jul 13 2007 21:28:53 Runtime Event Log: succeeded Jul 13 2007 21:28:53 Running Config: succeeded Jul 13 2007 21:28:53 DellEMC# High Availability (HA) 585
PAGE 586
19 ICMP Message Types This section lists and describes the possible ICMP message type resulting from a ping. The first three columns list the possible symbol or type/code. For example, you would receive a ! or 03 as an echo reply from your ping. Table 4. ICMP messages and their definitions Symbol Type Code . 0 U 3 3 586 Error echo reply . destination unreachable: 0 network unreachable . 1 host unreachable . 2 protocol unreachable . 3 port unreachable .
PAGE 587
Table 4. ICMP messages and their definitions (continued) Symbol Type Code Description 0 time-to-live equals 0 during transit . 1 time-to-live equals 0 during reassembly . 12 Query Error parameter problem: 1 IP header bad (catchall error) . 2 required option missing . 13 0 timestamp request . 14 0 timestamp reply . 15 0 information request (obsolete) . 16 0 information reply (obsolete) . 17 0 address mask request . 18 0 address mask reply .
PAGE 588
20 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) The IGMP commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • IGMP Commands IGMP Snooping Commands IGMP Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports IGMPv1/v2/v3 and is compliant with RFC-3376. Important Points to Remember ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports protocol-independent multicast-sparse (PIM-SM) and protocol-independent sourcespecific multicast (PIM-SSM) include and exclude modes. ● IGMPv2 is the default version of IGMP on interfaces.
PAGE 589
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 590
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 591
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series. The access list accepted is an extended ACL.
PAGE 592
Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Querier normally sends some group-specific queries when a leave message is received for a group prior to deleting a group from the membership database. There may be situations when you require immediate deletion of a group from the membership database. This command provides a way to achieve the immediate deletion.
PAGE 593
Version Description E-Series legacy command ip igmp query-interval Change the transmission frequency of IGMP general queries the Querier sends. Syntax ip igmp query-interval seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip igmp query-interval command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds between queries sent out. The range is from 1 to 18000. The default is 60 seconds. 60 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 594
Usage Information If you have configured the hello interval value to be greater than 18000, you must first reset that value to be less than or equal to 18000 before upload. Otherwise, the command execution fails during bootup and the hello interval value is set to the default value. ip igmp query-max-resp-time Set the maximum query response time advertised in general queries. NOTE: The IGMP query-max-resp-time value must be less than the IGMP query-interval value.
PAGE 595
ip igmp ssm-map To translate (*,G) memberships to (S,G) memberships, use a statically configured list. Syntax ip igmp [vrf vrf-name] ssm-map std-access-list source-address Undo this configuration, that is, remove SSM map (S,G) states and replace them with (*,G) state, use the ip igmp [vrf vrf-name] ssm-map std-access-list source-address command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF.
PAGE 596
ip igmp version Manually set the version of the router to IGMPv2 or IGMPv3. Syntax ip igmp version {2 | 3} Parameters Defaults 2 Enter the number 2 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv2. 3 Enter the number 3 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv3. 2 (IGMPv2) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 597
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format to view information on that group only. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and the interface information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
PAGE 598
Example Example (VLT) Field Description Uptime Displays the amount of time the group has been operational. Expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires. Last Reporter Displays the IP address of the last host to be a member of the IGMP group. DellEMC# show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 5 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Uptime Expires 225.0.0.0 Vlan 100 00:00:05 00:02:04 225.0.0.1 Vlan 100 00:00:05 00:02:04 225.0.0.
PAGE 599
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view IGMP interfaces associated with that VRF. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and the interface information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 600
Inbound IGMP access group is not set Internet address is 35.0.0.1/24 IGMP is enabled on interface IGMP query interval is 60 seconds IGMP querier timeout is 125 seconds IGMP max query response time is 10 seconds IGMP last member query response interval is 1000 ms IGMP immediate-leave is enabled for all groups IGMP activity: 0 joins IGMP querying router is 35.0.0.
PAGE 601
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 602
● IGMP snooping reacts to Layer 2 topology changes multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) triggers by sending a general query on the interface that comes in the FWD state. Important Points to Remember for IGMP Querier ● The IGMP snooping Querier supports version 2. ● You must configure an IP address to the VLAN interface for IGMP snooping Querier to begin.
PAGE 603
debug ip igmp snooping Enable debugging of IGMP snooping packets on interfaces and groups. Syntax debug ip igmp snooping [group address | interface] ● To disable debugging of IGMP snooping, use the no debug ip igmp snooping [group address | interface] command. ● To disable all debugging, use the undebug all command. Parameters snooping Enter the keyword snooping to enable debugging of IGMP snooping. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP multicast group address in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 604
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
PAGE 605
Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command.
PAGE 606
ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval The last member query interval is the maximum response time inserted into Group-Specific queries sent in response to GroupLeave messages. Syntax ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval milliseconds To return to the default value, use the no ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval command. Parameters Defaults milliseconds Enter the interval in milliseconds. The range is from 100 to 65535. The default is 1000 milliseconds.
PAGE 607
To delete a specific multicast router interface, use the no igmp snooping mrouter interface interface command. Parameters interface interface Defaults Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 608
To disable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN interface, use the no ip igmp snooping querier command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN — (conf-if-vl-n) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 609
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display the IGMPv3 source information.
PAGE 610
show ip igmp snooping mrouter Display multicast router interfaces. Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan number] Parameters vlan number Enter the keyword vlan then the vlan number. The range is from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 611
21 Interfaces To configure egress, port channel, time domain, and UDP, use these interface commands. Topics: • • • • • Basic Interface Commands Egress Interface Selection (EIS) Commands Port Channel Commands Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) Commands UDP Broadcast Commands Basic Interface Commands The following commands are for Physical, Loopback, and Null interfaces.
PAGE 612
● For ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port/[subport] - slot/port/[subport]. For example, if you want to clear the port configurations corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1/1/1 - 1/1/4. vrrp [ipv6 {vr-id} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrrp to clear the counters of all VRRP groups. To | vr-id] clear the counters of VRRP groups on all IPv6 interfaces, enter ipv6.
PAGE 613
Related Commands ● mac learning-limit — allow aging of MACs even though a learning-limit is configured or disallow station move on learned MACs. clear counters eee Clear the counters for EEE on all copper ports or specific ports. Syntax Parameters clear counters [interface—type [slot/port | slot/port-range]] eee interface-type Enter the interface information as TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot and the port number or range of port numbers.
PAGE 614
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.
PAGE 615
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 616
range Defaults ● For non-ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interfacetype 1/1 - 4. ● For ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port/[subport] - slot/port/[subport]. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1/1/1 - 1/1/4.
PAGE 617
Defaults None Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 618
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 619
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.3.0.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. To enable routing of RRoCE packets, the VLAN ID is mapped to the default VLAN ID of 4095 and this mapping is performed using VLAN translation. After VLAN translation, the RRoCE packets are considered in the same manner as normal IP packets that received on L3 interface and routed in the egress direction.
PAGE 620
errdisable recovery interval Configure recovery time interval to move an interface from the Err-disabled state. Syntax errdisable recovery interval seconds To remove the configured recovery time interval, use the no errdisable recovery interval seconds command. Parameters Defaults interval seconds Enter the keyword interval and the number of seconds to recover the interface from Err-disabled state. The range is from 30 to 86,400 seconds. The default is 300 seconds. 300 seconds.
PAGE 621
Example To enable EEE: DellEMC(conf)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)# eee To disable EEE: DellEMC(conf)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)# no eee flowcontrol Control how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause flow control frames. Syntax flowcontrol {rx {off | on} tx {off | on} [negotiate | pause-threshold value | resume-offset value] | [monitor session-ID]} To return to the default, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 622
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.6.0.0 Added support for the negotiate feature on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 6.5.1.9 and 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.
PAGE 623
off off off off on on off on off on off on off off on on off on off on on off off off on on off on off on on on off off on on off on off on LocNegRx off off off off LocNegTx RemNegRx RemNegTx off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on off off off on off off off off off off on on on off off on on off off on on off on on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on interface Configure a physical or virtual interface on the switch.
PAGE 624
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 625
interface group Create or delete group of VLANs with a single command. You can also use this command to apply a set of configurations on a group of interfaces. Syntax interface group [interface | vlan vlanid {- vlanid } ] To delete a range of VLANs, use the following command: no interface group vlan vlanid {- vlanid} Parameters interface, interface,... Enter the keywords interface group and one of the interfaces — slot/port or VLAN number. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration.
PAGE 626
Related Commands ● interface range — configure a range of interfaces. ● interface vlan — configures a VLAN. interface loopback Configure a Loopback interface. Syntax interface loopback number To remove a loopback interface, use the no interface loopback number command. Parameters Defaults number Enter a number as the interface number. The range is from 0 to 16383. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 627
interface managementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system (either the Primary or Standby RPM). Syntax Parameters Defaults interface managementEthernet slot/port slot/port Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 628
Defaults Not configured; number = 0 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 629
— {slot/port | port},... Defaults ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ● For a Tunnel interface, enter the keyword Tunnel then a number from 1 to 16383.
PAGE 630
● The interface range prompt includes interface types with slot/port information for valid interfaces. The prompt allows for a maximum of 32 characters. If the bulk configuration exceeds 32 characters, it is represented by an ellipsis ( ... ). ● When the interface range prompt has multiple port ranges, the smaller port range is excluded from the prompt. ● If overlapping port ranges are specified, the port range is extended to the smallest start port and the biggest end port.
PAGE 631
DellEMC(config-if-range-gi-1/1-1/2,gi-5/1-5/23,vl-2-100,po-1-25)# no shutdown DellEMC(config-if-range)# Example (Batch Mode Configuration) Primary VLT DellEMC(conf-b)#int range Tengigabitethernet 3/0 - 5 DellEMC(conf-if-range-te-3/0-5)#mtu 4500 DellEMC(conf-if-range-te-3/0-5)#exit DellEMC(conf-b)#show conf interface range tengigabitethernet 3/0 - 5 mtu 4500 DellEMC(conf-b)#commit DellEMC(conf-b)#Dec 6 11:30:45 %RPM1-P:CP %CLIBATCH-6CLI_BATCH_CONFIG_IN_PROGRESS_TRAP: Batch configuration commit is in progres
PAGE 632
Example (Single Range) Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 633
Example (Single Range) Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 634
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810; added support for OpenFlow. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000.
PAGE 635
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.2 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.
PAGE 636
Usage Information Example (Single Interface) Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.
PAGE 637
Traffic statistics: Input bytes: Output bytes: Input packets: Output packets: 64B packets: Over 64B packets: Over 127B packets: Over 255B packets: Over 511B packets: Over 1023B packets: Error statistics: Input underruns: Input giants: Input throttles: Input CRC: Input IP checksum: Input overrun: Output underruns: Output throttles: m l T q Example (All Interfaces) - Current 9069828 606915800 54001 9401589 67 49166 350 1351 286 2781 43 43 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rate Bps Bps pps pps pps pps pps pps pps pps 0 0 0
PAGE 638
Parameters Defaults value Enter a maximum frame size in bytes. The range is from 594 to 12000. 1554 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 639
Layer 2 Overhead Link MTU and IP MTU Delta Ethernet (untagged) 18 bytes VLAN Tag 22 bytes Untagged Packet 22 bytes with VLAN-Stack Header Tagged Packet 26 bytes with VLAN-Stack Header negotiation auto Enable auto-negotiation on an interface. Syntax negotiation auto To disable auto-negotiation, use the no negotiation auto command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 640
NOTE: The mode option is not available on non-10/100/1000 Base-T systems. If you do not use the mode option, the default setting is slave. If you do not configure forced-master or forced-slave on a port, the port negotiates to either a master or a slave state. Port status is one of the following: ● ● ● ● ● Forced-master Force-slave Master Slave Auto-neg Error — typically indicates that both ends of the node are configured with forced-master or forced-slave.
PAGE 641
● auto-negotiation disabled speed 100 ● auto-negotiation enabled speed 100 ● auto-negotiation disabled speed 100 Link Status Between Port 1 and Port 2 ● ● ● ● ● Up at 1000 Mb/s Up at 100 Mb/s Up at 100 Mb/s Down Down * You cannot disable auto-negotiation when the speed is set to 1000 or auto. no port-delay-restore (Interface Mode) Disables delayed bring up of individual interfaces during switch boot up.
PAGE 642
Usage Information When you enable this feature, it allows you to set the delay timer value between 1 second to 300 seconds on all ports globally. To disable the timer on all ports, use the no port-delay-restore command. To disable the timer on an individual interface, use the no port-delay-restore command in the INTERFACE mode. NOTE: In a stacking environment, the port-delay-restore timer kicks in for each individual stack-unit separately as it boots up.
PAGE 643
● True — port is tagged ● False — port is untagged ● Hybrid — port accepts both tagged and untagged frames The following describes the interface vlan command shown in the following example. This example shows unconfiguration of the hybrid port using the no portmode hybrid command. NOTE: Remove all other configurations on the port before you can remove the hybrid configuration from the port.
PAGE 644
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 645
When rate-interval is configured only in the global configuration mode and not in the interface mode, the global rate-interval value is applied at the interface level also. When rate-interval is configured at the interface level and not in the global configuration mode, the interface level rate-interval value is applied for an interface.
PAGE 646
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
PAGE 647
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S3100 series, S4820T, and S5000. Use the show hardware counters interface interface—type slot/port to view the hardware counters on the specified interface.
PAGE 648
TX - 64 Byte Frame Counter TX - 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter TX - 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter TX - 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter TX - 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter TX - 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter TX - 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter TX - 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter TX - 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter TX - 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter TX - Good Packet Counter TX - Packet/Frame Counter TX - Unicast Frame Counter TX - Multicast Frame Counter TX - Broadcast Frame Counter TX - Byte Coun
PAGE 649
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - Broadcast Frame Counter Byte Counter Control Frame Counter Pause Control Frame Counter Oversized Frame Counter Jabber Frame Counter VLAN Tag Frame Counter Double VLAN Tag Frame Counter RUNT Frame Counter Fragment Counter VLAN Tagged Packets Ingress Dropped Packet MTU Check Error Frame Counte
PAGE 650
TX TX TX TX TX TX - Debug Counter 8 Debug Counter 9 Debug Counter 10 Debug Counter 11 EEE LPI Event Counter EEE LPI Duration Counter 0 0 0 0 0 0 <> Related Commands ● show interfaces — display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface. show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
PAGE 651
Version Description Added support to display 10GBASE-T information on the S4048, S4048T, S6000, S6000-ON, S6100, Z9500, S6010, and Z9100. Included display information about EEE on the S3048–ON. Usage Information 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. Included display information about EEE on the S3100 series, S4820T, and S5000. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.
PAGE 652
Line Description TenGigabitEther net 1/1... Interface type and administrative and line protocol status. Hardware is... Interface hardware information, assigned MAC address, and current address. Pluggable media present... Present pluggable media wavelength, type, and rate.
PAGE 653
Line Description ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Example Example Vlans = number of VLAN tagged packets throttles = packets containing PAUSE frames discarded = number of packets discarded without any processing collisions = number of packet collisions wred=count both packets discarded in the MAC and in the hardware-based queues Rate information... Estimate of the input and output traffic rate over a designated interval (30 to 299 seconds). Traffic rate is displayed in bits, packets per second, and percent of line rate.
PAGE 654
0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.
PAGE 655
Example (Management Ethernet) Example (Management Ethernet, two IPv6 addresses) DellEMC# show interfaces managementethernet 1/1 ManagementEthernet 1/1 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:0b:a9:4c Current address is 00:01:e8:0b:a9:4c Pluggable media not present Interface index is 503595208 Internet address is 10.11.201.
PAGE 656
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:05:12 Queueing strategy: fifo Time since last interface status change: 00:05:12 Related Commands ● show interfaces configured – display any interface with a non-default configuration. ● show ip interface – display Layer 3 information about the interfaces. ● show range – display all interfaces configured using the interface range command. show interfaces configured Display any interface with a non-default configuration.
PAGE 657
0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 10 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 1 packets, 64 bytes, 0 underruns 1 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 1 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions Rate info (interval 299 seconds): In
PAGE 658
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 659
Use the show interfaces interface-type slot/port eee command to view the status of EEE on the specified port. Use the show interfaces interface-type slot/port-range eee command to view the status of EEE on the specified range of ports. Example Example for all the interfaces: Example for a specific interface: Related Commands ● show interfaces — display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
PAGE 660
NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. However, for Open Networking (ON) platforms the notation for specifying port range in the command is different from how you specify in nonON platforms. ● For non-ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interfacetype 1/1 - 4.
PAGE 661
to exactly match the mode of operation as the link partner or else no link can be established. 1000Base-T Control 1000Base-T requires auto-negotiation. The IEEE Ethernet standard does not support setting a speed to 1000 Mbps with the speed command without autonegotiation. E-Series line cards support both full-duplex and half-duplex 1000BaseT. Phy Specific Control Values are: Phy Specific Status Displays PHY-specific status information.
PAGE 662
show interfaces stack-unit Display information on all interfaces on a specific S-Series or Z-Series stack member. Syntax show interfaces stack-unit unit-number Parameters unit-number Enter the stack member number. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example 662 Interfaces This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 663
GigabitEthernet 1/2 is down, line protocol is down Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:83 Current address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:83 !-------------output truncated ----------------! Related Commands ● show hardware stack-unit — display data plane and management plane input/output statistics. show interfaces status To display status information on a specific interface only, display a summary of interface information or specify a stack-unit slot and interface.
PAGE 664
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 665
● For port–channel interfaces, you can specify multiple ports as port-range. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces port— channel 1 - 4. stack-unit unit-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack member number. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 666
802.1QTagged: Hybrid Vlan membership: Vlan 2, Vlan 20 Native VlanId: 20 Name: GigabitEthernet 1/2 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 Name: GigabitEthernet 1/3 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 Name: GigabitEthernet 1/4 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 --More-Related Commands ● interface — configure a physical interface on the switch. ● show ip interface — display Layer 3 information about the interfaces.
PAGE 667
Usage Information Version Description 9.11(0.0) Added support to display 10GBASE-T information on the S4048, S4048T, S6000, S6000-ON, S6100, Z9500, S6010, and Z9100. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.0) Added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 668
Line Description Voltage Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Bias Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. TX Power Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. RX Power Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Temp High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
PAGE 669
Line Description is set to true. If it falls below the low alarm/warning thresholds, the Rx power low alarm/warning flag is set to true. Data Ready state This field indicates that the transceiver has achieved power up and data is ready. Bar This is set to true if data is ready to be sent and set to false if data is being transmitted. Rx LOS state This is the digital state of the Rx_LOS output pin. This is set to true if the operating status is down.
PAGE 670
Example Line Description Tx Bias Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the present Tx bias current value displayed above. Tx Power Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value displayed above. Rx Power Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value displayed above. DellEMC# show interfaces GigabitEthernet 1/1 transceiver SFP is present.
PAGE 671
SFP 1 Rx LOS state = True SFP 1 Tx Fault state = False SFP 1 Rate Select state = False SFP 1 RS state = False SFP 1 Tx Disable state = False =================================== SFP 1 Temperature High Alarm Flag = False SFP 1 Voltage High Alarm Flag = False SFP 1 Tx Bias High Alarm Flag = False SFP 1 Tx Power High Alarm Flag = False SFP 1 Rx Power High Alarm Flag = False SFP 1 Temperature Low Alarm Flag = False SFP 1 Voltage Low Alarm Flag = False SFP 1 Tx Bias Low Alarm Flag = False SFP 1 Tx Power Low Alarm
PAGE 672
Example DellEMC# show interfaces vlan 10 Vlan 10 is up, line protocol is down Address is 90:b1:1c:f4:99:ce, Current address is 90:b1:1c:f4:99:ce Interface index is 1107787786 Internet address is not set Mode of IPv4 Address Assignment: NONE DHCP Client-ID: 90b11cf499ce MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed auto ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 2d17h26m Queueing strategy: fifo Time since last interface status change: 2d17h26m Input Statistics: 0 packets,
PAGE 673
Related Commands ● interface — configure a physical interface on the switch. ● show ip interface — display Layer 3 information about the interfaces. show running-config ecmp-group Display interfaces, LAG, or LAG link bundles being monitored for uneven traffic distribution using the ecmp-group monitoring enable command. The ECMP group could have a LAG or a list of interfaces (not just LAG link-bundles). Syntax show running-config ecmp-group Defaults Disabled.
PAGE 674
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information The shutdown command marks a physical interface as unavailable for traffic. To discover if an interface is disabled, use the show ip interface brief command. Disabled interfaces are listed as down. Disabling a VLAN or a port channel causes different behavior.
PAGE 675
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14.1.2 Introduced the option 10000 speed setting on the S5048F-ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Added support for fanned–out 1 Gigabit SFP port. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 676
Defaults auto Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 677
Defaults port-channel (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords port-channel if the backup port is a static or dynamic port channel. mode (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mode to set the interface mode. private-vlan (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords private-vlan to set the interface mode to private VLAN mode. host (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword host to set the private VLAN interface to host mode. promiscuous (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword promiscuous to set the private VLAN interface to promiscuous mode.
PAGE 678
To use the switchport backup interface command on a port, first enter the switchport command. For more information, see “Configuring Redundant Links” in the Layer 2 section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. wavelength Set the wavelength for tunable 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics. Syntax wavelength To retain the existing wavelength, use the no wavelength command. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 679
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● all Defaults For For For For For For For For Radius, enter the keyword radius. sFlow collectors, enter the keyword sflow-collector. SNMP (traps and MIB responses), enter the keywords snmp . SSH, enter the keyword ssh . Syslog, enter the keyword syslog. TACACS, enter the keyword tacacs. Telnet, enter the keyword telnet. TFTP, enter the keyword tftp. Configure all applications. None. Command Modes EIS Mode (conf-mgmt-eis) Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 680
clear management application pkt-cntr Clear management application packet counters for all management application types. Syntax clear management application pkt-cntr Defaults None. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.
PAGE 681
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. show ip management-eis-route Display the management routes used by EIS. Syntax show ip management-eis-route Defaults None. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant DellEMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 682
ssh syslog tacacs telnet tftp : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 show management application pkt-fallback-cntr Display the number of packets for each application type that have been rerouted to the default routing table due to management port or route lookup failure. Syntax show management application pkt—fallback-cntr Defaults None. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 683
channel-member Add an interface to the Port Channel, while in INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL mode. Syntax channel-member interface To delete an interface from a Port Channel, use the no channel-member interface command. Parameters interface (OPTIONAL) Enter any of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 684
● The Port Channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members. For example, if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the Port Channel’s MTU values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU. When an interface is removed from a Port Channel with the no channel-member command, the interface reverts to its configuration prior to joining the Port Channel.
PAGE 685
Related Commands Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series. ● port-channel failover-group — access PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP mode to configure a LAG failover group. ● show interfaces port-channel — display information on configured Port Channel groups. interface port-channel Create a Port Channel interface, which is a link aggregation group (LAG) containing 16 physical interfaces on the S-Series.
PAGE 686
interface can only have the shutdown, description, and name commands configured. The Port Channel’s configuration is applied to the interfaces within the Port Channel. A Port Channel can contain any physical interface. Based on the first interface configured in the Port Channel and enabled, Dell EMC Networking OS determines the common speed. For more information, refer to channel-member. If the line card is in a Jumbo mode chassis, you can also configure the mtu and ip mtu commands.
PAGE 687
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. If you use this command to configure the minimum number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status, the LAG must have at least that number of “oper up” links before it can be declared as up. For example, if the required minimum is four, and only three are up, the LAG is considered down.
PAGE 688
show config Display the current configuration of the selected LAG. Syntax show config Command Modes INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 689
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Increased the number of port channels to 4096. 9.9(0.0) Added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.8(2.
PAGE 690
Example Field Description packets input... Displays the number of packets and bytes into the interface. Input 0 IP packets... Displays the number of packets with IP headers, VLAN tagged headers, and MPLS headers. The number of packets may not add correctly because a VLAN tagged IP packet counts as both a VLAN packet and an IP packet. 0 64-byte... Displays the size of packets and the number of those packets entering that interface. This information is displayed over two lines. Received 0...
PAGE 691
Field Description (untitled) Displays the status of the physical interfaces (up or down). ● In Layer 2 port channels, an * (asterisk) indicates which interface is the primary port of the port channel. The primary port sends out interface PDU. ● In Layer 3 port channels, the primary port is not indicated.
PAGE 692
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Increased the number of port channels to 4096. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 693
Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) Commands TDR is useful for troubleshooting an interface that is not establishing a link; either it is flapping or not coming up at all. TDR detects open or short conditions of copper cables on 100/1000 Base-T modules. Important Points to Remember ● The interface and port must be enabled (configured—refer to the interface command) before running TDR. An error message is generated if you have not enabled the interface.
PAGE 694
Related Commands ● show tdr — display the results of the TDR test. show tdr Display the TDR test results. Syntax show tdr interface Parameters Defaults interface Enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information for the 100/1000 Ethernet interface. None Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 695
Example Related Commands DellEMC# show tdr gigabitethernet 10/47 Time since last test: 00:00:02 Pair A, Length: OK Status: Terminated Pair B, Length: 92 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Short Pair C, Length: 93 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Open Pair D, Length: 0 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Impedance Mismatch ● tdr-cable-test — run the TDR test.
PAGE 696
ip udp-helper udp-port Enable the UDP broadcast feature on an interface either for all UDP ports or a specified list of UDP ports. Syntax ip udp-helper udp-port [udp-port-list] To disable the UDP broadcast on a port, use the no ip udp-helper udp-port [udp-portlist] command. Parameters udp-port-list (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 16 comma-separated UDP port numbers. NOTE: If you do not use this option, all UDP ports are considered by default.
PAGE 697
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Pre-version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show ip udp-helper -------------------------------------------------Port UDP port list -------------------------------------------------Gi 10/2 656, 658 Gi 10/3 All ● debug ip udp-helper — enable debug and displays the debug information on a console.
PAGE 698
22 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) Internet protocol security (IPSec) is an end-to-end security scheme for securing IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a session. Use IPSec between hosts, gateways, or hosts and gateways. IPSec uses a series of protocol functions to achieve information security: ● Authentication Headers (AH) — Connectionless integrity and origin authentication for IP packets.
PAGE 699
ahauthentication Enter the keywords ah-authentication then the transform type of operation to apply to traffic. The transform type represents the encryption or authentication applied to traffic. ● md5 — Use Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication. ● sha1 — Use Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA-1) authentication. ● null — Causes an encryption policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface.
PAGE 700
crypto ipsec policy Create a crypto policy used by ipsec. Syntax crypto ipsec policy name seq-num ipsec-manual To delete a crypto policy entry, use the no crypto ipsec policy name seq-num ipsecmanual command. Parameters Defaults name Enter the name for the crypto policy set. seq-num Enter the sequence number assigned to the crypto policy entry. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 701
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. match Apply an match filter to the crypto policy. Syntax match seq-num tcp [sourceip address | ipv6 address {mask} {source-port number}] [destination ip address | ipv6 address {mask} {destination-port number}] To remove the match filter for the crypto map, use the no match seq-num tcp [source ip address | ipv6 address {mask} {source-port number}] [destination ip address | ipv6 address {mask} {destination-port number}] command.
PAGE 702
session-key Specify the session keys used in the crypto policy entry. Syntax session-key {inbound | outbound} {ah spi hex-key-string | esp spi encrypt hex-key-string auth hex-key-string To delete the session key information from the crypto policy, use the no session-key {inbound | outbound} {ah | esp} command. Parameters Defaults name Enter the name for the transform set. inbound Specify the inbound session key for IPSec. outbound Specify the outbound session key for IPSec.
PAGE 703
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. DellEMC# show crypto ipsec transform-set Transform-Set Name Transform-Set refCnt AH Transform ESP Auth Transform ESP Encry Transform DellEMC# : dallas : 0 : : : 3des show crypto ipsec policy Display the crypto policy configuration.
PAGE 704
Source address Source mask Source port Destination address Destination mask Destination port source-interface name source-interface num : : : : : : : : 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 23 DellEMC(conf-crypto-policy)# transform-set Specify the transform set the crypto policy uses. Syntax transform-set transform-set-name To delete a transform set from the crypto policy, use the no transform-set transform-setname command.
PAGE 705
23 IPv4 Routing The basic IPv4 commands are supported by Dell EMC Networking OS on the platform.
PAGE 706
• • • • • show show show show show ip route ip route list ip route summary ip traffic tcp statistics arp To associate an IP address with a MAC address in the switch, use address resolution protocol (ARP). Syntax arp [vrf vrf-name] ip-address mac-address interface To remove an ARP address, use the no arp ip-address command. Parameters vrf vrf-name Enter a VRF name to configure an ARP entry for that VRF. Use the VRF option after the keyword arp to configure a static arp on that particular VRF.
PAGE 707
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You cannot use Class D or Class E IP addresses or zero IP address (0.0.0.0) when creating a static ARP. Zero MAC addresses (00:00:00:00:00:00) are also invalid. You can use the vrf attribute of this command to create a static ARP entry on either a default or a nondefault VRF.
PAGE 708
Usage Information This timer is an exponential backoff timer. Over the specified period, the time between ARP requests increases. This behavior reduces the potential for the system to slow down while waiting for a multitude of ARP responses. Related Commands ● show arp retries — display the configured number of ARP retries. arp learn-enable Enable ARP learning using gratuitous ARP.
PAGE 709
arp max-entries Enables you to configure the maximum number of ARP entries per VRF that are allowed for IPv4.. Syntax Parameters Defaults arp max-entries [vrf vrf-name] max-number vrf vrf-name Enter the name of a specific VRF for which you want to configure maximum number of ARP entries that IPv4 allows. max-number Enter the maximum number of ARP entries that a VRF RTM can hold. The range is from 0 to 65535. Not configured.
PAGE 710
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information Retries are 20 seconds apart.
PAGE 711
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. clear arp-cache Clear the dynamic ARP entries from a specific interface or optionally delete (no-refresh) ARP entries from the content addressable memory (CAM).
PAGE 712
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Added support for 4094 VLANs on the E-Series (the prior limit was 2094). 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.9.1.
PAGE 713
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. clear ip fib stack-unit Clear all FIB entries in the specified stack unit (use this command with caution, refer to Usage Information.) Syntax Parameters clear ip fib stack-unit unit-number vrf vrf-name unit-number Enter the number of the stack unit.
PAGE 714
Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to clear the routes corresponding to that VRF. * Enter an asterisk (*) to clear all learned IP routes. ip-address mask Enter a specific IP address and mask in dotted decimal format to clear that IP address from the routing table. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 715
Parameters all Enter the keyword all to clear all TCP statistics maintained on all switch processors. cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the cp to clear only statistics from the Control Processor. rp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp to clear only the statistics from Route Processor. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 716
count value Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count then the count value. The range is from 1 to 65534. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 717
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
PAGE 718
to 113.3.3.254 DellEMC# Related Commands ● ip helper-address – specify the destination broadcast or host address for the DHCP server request. ● ip helper-address hop-count disable – disable the hop-count increment for the DHCP relay agent. debug ip icmp View information on the internal control message protocol (ICMP). Syntax debug ip icmp [interface] [count value] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip icmp command.
PAGE 719
Example Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.3.1.0 Added the count option. ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: echo request rcvd from src 40.40.40.40 src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo echo request sent to dst 40.40.40.40 echo request rcvd from src 40.40.40.40 src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.
PAGE 720
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Added support for 4094 VLANs on the E-Series (the prior limit was 2094). 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.
PAGE 721
IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.3 (Ma 1/1), len 1500, sending fragment IP Fragment, Ident = 4741, fragment offset = 1480 IP: s=40.40.40.40 (local), d=224.0.0.5 (Gi 4/11), len 64, sending broad/ multicast proto=89 IP: s=40.40.40.40 (local), d=224.0.0.6 (Gi 4/11), len 28, sending broad/ multicast proto=2 IP: s=0.0.0.0, d=30.30.30.30, len 100, unroutable ICMP type=8, code=0 IP: s=0.0.0.0, d=30.30.30.
PAGE 722
ip address Assign a primary and secondary IP address to the interface. Syntax ip address ip-address mask [secondary] To delete an IP address from an interface, use the no ip address [ip-address] command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format. mask Enter the mask of the IP address in slash prefix format (for example, /24). secondary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword secondary to designate the IP address as the secondary address. Not configured.
PAGE 723
To disable the interface from receiving directed broadcast packets, use the no ip directedbroadcast command. Defaults Disabled (that is, the interface does not receive directed broadcast packets) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 724
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 725
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 726
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. You can only configure one domain name with the ip domain-name command.
PAGE 727
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Added support for IPv6. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 728
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.3.1.0 Introduced for the E-Series. Usage Information This command disables the incrementing of the hops field when boot requests are relayed to a DHCP server through Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 729
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced for the E-Series.
PAGE 730
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms.
PAGE 731
● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 732
Defaults No limit is set on number of fragments allowed. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.
PAGE 733
Usage Information Use this command to specify the maximum number of protocol routes that the Route Table Manager can hold for a specific VRF. This command does not apply to the management VRFs. Related Commands ● show ip route — view the switch routing table. ● show ipv6 route — display the IPv6 routes. ip name-server Enter up to six IPv4 addresses of name servers. The order you enter the addresses determines the order of their use. Syntax ip name-server ipv4-address [ipv4-address2...
PAGE 734
In a dual stack setup, the system sends both A (request for IPv4 — RFC 1035) and AAAA (request for IPv6 — RFC 3596) record requests to a DNS server even if only the ip name-server command is configured. ip proxy-arp Enable proxy ARP on an interface. Syntax ip proxy-arp To disable proxy ARP, use the no ip proxy-arp command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands 734 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 735
ip route Assign a static route to the switch. Syntax ip route [vrf vrf-name] ip-address mask {ip-address | interface [ipaddress]} [distance] [name description] [permanent] [tag tag-value] [vrf vrf-name] [weight weight-value] To delete a specific static route, use the no ip route destination mask command. To delete all routes matching a certain route, use the no ip route destination mask command.
PAGE 736
weight weight- value Defaults Enter the keyword weight followed by a weight value. The range is from 0 to 255. NOTE: Weight for a static route can be added only for the destination address and not for the route pointing to destination a interface. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 737
route (destination) has a non-zero weight assigned to it and other paths do not have any weight configured, then regular ECMP is used for forwarding. You can specify the weight value only to destination address and not on the egress port. A route is considered for weighted ECMP calculations only if each paths corresponding to that route is configured with a weight. You cannot use the VRF attribute of this command to configure routes in a management VRF.
PAGE 738
Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ip unreachables Enable the generation of internet control message protocol (ICMP) unreachable messages. Syntax ip unreachables To disable the generation of ICMP messages, use the no ip unreachables command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History 738 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 739
load-balance By default, for C-Series and S-Series, Dell EMC Networking OS uses an IP 4-tuple (IP SA, IP DA, Source Port, and Destination Port) to distribute IP traffic over members of a Port Channel as well as equal-cost paths. To designate another method to balance traffic over Port Channel members, use the load-balance command.
PAGE 740
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.0 Added the ingress-port parameter for the S4810. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 741
Defaults dest-port-id | dest-module-id | vlan | ethertype | source-destmac ] ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● tunnel [ ipv4over-ipv4 | ipv4over-gre-ipv4 | mac-in-mac ]} To use tunnel key fields in hash computation, enter the keyword tunnel then one of the parameters: source-port-id — Use src-port-id field in hash calculation. source-module-id — Use src-module-id field in hash calculation. dest-mac — Use dest-mac field in hash calculation. dest-port-id — Use dest-port-id field in hash calculation.
PAGE 742
ipv6-address prefix-length Enter an IPv6 address (x:x:x:x::x format) and mask (/prefix format) of the destination subnet. Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. forwardingrouter-address Enter an IP address (dotted decimal format) or an IPv6 address (x:x:x:x::x format) of a forwarding router.
PAGE 743
show arp Display the ARP table. Syntax Parameters show arp [vrf vrf-name] [interface interface | ip ip-address [mask] | macaddress mac-address [mac-address mask]] [retries] [static | dynamic] [inspection {database | statistics][summary] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF. NOTE: Use this attribute to start a BGP instance for either a specific address family corresponding to the default VRF or an IPv4 address family corresponding to a non-default VRF.
PAGE 744
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF and added usage information for the clear arp-cache command. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.
PAGE 745
Internet Internet Internet Internet Example (Private VLAN) 192.2.1.248 192.2.1.247 192.2.1.246 192.2.1.245 1 1 1 1 00:00:c0:02:01:02 00:00:c0:02:01:02 00:00:c0:02:01:02 00:00:c0:02:01:02 Gi Gi Gi Gi 2/13 2/13 2/13 2/13 - CP CP CP CP NOTE: In this example, Line 1 shows community VLAN 200 (in primary VLAN 10) in a PVLAN. Line 2 shows primary VLAN 10. DellEMC# show arp Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU --------------------------------------------------------------Internet 5.
PAGE 746
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Introduced. ● arp retries — set the number of ARP retries in case the system does not receive an ARP reply in response to an ARP request.
PAGE 747
Usage Information The following describes the show hosts command in the following example. Field Description Default domain... Displays the domain name (if configured). Name/address lookup... States if DNS is enabled on the system. ● If DNS is enabled, the Name/Address lookup is domain service. ● If DNS is not enabled, the Name/Address lookup is static mapping Name servers are... Lists the name servers, if configured. Host Displays the host name assigned to the IP address.
PAGE 748
network mask [longer-prefixes [ecmp-group detail]] ecmp-group {detail | memberinfo [detail [group-index index-number ]]} summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address and mask of a route to CAM entries for that route only. You can enter one of the following keywords to filter results. ● Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view routes with a common prefix. ● Enter the keyword ecmp-group detail to view the ECMP group index.
PAGE 749
Field Description ● CP = control processor ● Gi = Gigabit Ethernet interface ● Te = 10–Gigabit Ethernet interface Example DellEMC# show ip cam stack-unit 3 po 0 1.1.1.0/24 longer-prefixes Destination EC C VId Mac-Addr Port --------------------------------------------------------------1.1.1.2/32 0 0 3000 00:05:00:00:00:02 Gi 3/44 1.1.1.1/32 0 1 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 1.1.1.
PAGE 750
● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 751
Example (Show command output with Weighted ECMP Enabled) DellEMC# show ip fib stack-unit 1 Destination Gateway First-Hop Mac-Addr Port VId EC RC W -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 0 0 - 1.1.0/24 Direct, Lo 0 0.0.0.0 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 0 0 - 1.1.1.1/32 via 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 00:00:00:00:00:00 CP 0 0 - - The RC and W columns in the show output appear only if the weighted ECMP is enabled using the ip ecmp weighted command.
PAGE 752
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command provides egress port information for a given IP flow.
PAGE 753
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a brief summary of the interfaces and whether an IP address is assigned. configured (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword configured to display the physical interfaces with non-default configurations only. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.
PAGE 754
Address determined by user input IP MTU is 1500 bytes Directed broadcast forwarding is disabled Proxy ARP is enabled Split Horizon is enabled Poison Reverse is disabled ICMP redirects are not sent ICMP unreachables are not sent IP unicast RPF check is not supported DellEMC# DellEMC#show ip interface vlan 1 Vlan 1 is down, line protocol is down Internet address is not set IP MTU is 1500 bytes Directed broadcast forwarding is disabled Proxy ARP is enabled Split Horizon is enabled Poison Reverse is disabled IC
PAGE 755
static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view non-active routes also. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 756
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.4.1.
PAGE 757
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Regular evaluation optimization enabled/disabled added to display output. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show ip protocols Routing Protocol is "bgp 1" Cluster Id is set to 20.20.20.
PAGE 758
NOTE: bgp, isis, ospf, and rip. ● If you enter bgp, you can include the BGP as-number . ● If you enter isis, you can include the ISIS routing-tag. ● If you enter ospf, you can include the OSPF process-id. process-id (OPTIONAL) Specify that only OSPF routes with a certain process ID must be displayed. routing-tag (OPTIONAL) Specify that only ISIS routes with a certain routing tag must be displayed. connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to view only the directly connected routes.
PAGE 759
Field Description (undefined) Identifies the type of route: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● C = connected S = static R = RIP B = BGP IN = internal BGP EX = external BGP LO = Locally Originated O = OSPF IA = OSPF inter area N1 = OSPF NSSA external type 1 N2 = OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 = OSPF external type 1 E2 = OSPF external type 2 i = IS-IS L1 = IS-IS level-1 L2 = IS-IS level-2 IA = IS-IS inter-area * = candidate default > = non-active route + = summary routes The weight for weighted ECMP r
PAGE 760
Example (Summary) DellEMC# show ip route summary Route Source Active Routes Non-active Routes connected 2 0 static 1 0 Total 3 0 Total 3 active route(s) using 612 bytes R1_E600i>show ip route static ? | Pipe through a command R1_E600i>show ip route static Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change ----------- ------- ----------- ----------*S 0.0.0.0/0 via 10.10.91.
PAGE 761
Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway Change --------------------------S 1.1.1.0/24 4.4.4.2, via Gi 1/4 6.6.6.2, via Gi 1/16 C 4.4.4.0/24 Direct, Gi 1/4 C 6.6.6.0/24 Direct, Gi 1/16 Dist/Metric Last ----------1/0 00:00:01 0/0 0/0 00:01:32 00:01:25 DellEMC(conf)#do show ip route 1.1.1.0/24 Routing entry for 1.1.1.0/24 Known via "static", distance 1, metric 0 Last update 00:05:01 ago Routing Descriptor Blocks: * 4.4.4.2, via GigabitEthernet 1/4 * 6.6.6.
PAGE 762
Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 763
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip route summary shown in the following example.
PAGE 764
cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view only statistics from the Control Processor. rp1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp1 to view only the statistics from Route Processor 1. rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view only the statistics from Route Processor 2. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 765
Keyword Definition ... timeouts Number of times a timer expired on a reassembled queue. ... too big Number of invalid IP fragments received. ... couldn’t fragment Number of packets that could not be fragmented and forwarded. ...encapsulation failed Counts packets which could not be forwarded due to ARP resolution failure. Dell EMC Networking OS sends an arp request prior to forwarding an IP packet. If a reply is not received, Dell EMC Networking OS repeats the request three times.
PAGE 766
show tcp statistics View information on TCP traffic through the switch. Syntax show tcp statistics {all | cp} Parameters all Enter the keyword all to view all TCP information. cp Enter the keyword cp to view only TCP information from the Control Processor. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 767
Example Field Description 0 packets with data after window Displays the number of packets and bytes received that exceed the switch’s window size. 0 packets after close Displays the number of packet received after the TCP connection was closed. 0 window probe packets... Displays the number of window probe and update packets received. 41 dup ack... Displays the number of duplicate acknowledgement packets and acknowledgement packets with data received. 10184 ack...
PAGE 768
24 IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) IPv6 ACLs and IPv6 Route Map commands are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For IPv4 ACL commands, see Access Control Lists (ACL). Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Certain platforms require manual CAM usage space allotment. For more information, see cam-acl. Egress IPv6 ACL and IPv6 ACL on the Loopback interface is not supported. Reference to an empty ACL permits any traffic.
PAGE 769
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 770
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 771
Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : 2 3 -- Line card 4 -Current L2Acl : Ipv4Acl : Ipv6Acl : Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : Settings(in block sizes) 2 2 4 2 3 DellEMC# Related Commands ● cam-acl — configure CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs. permit icmp To allow all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter.
PAGE 772
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.
PAGE 773
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. ipv6 control-plane egress-filter Enable egress Layer 3 ACL lookup for IPv6 CPU traffic. Syntax ipv6 control-plane egress-filter Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 774
Defaults permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this condition. deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition. ospfv3 Specify that this ACL is for OSPFv3 control plane traffic All access lists contain an implicit “deny any”; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 775
● L3 ACL (ipv4acl: 1 ● IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 2 l2acl 1-4 ipv4acl 1- 4 ipv6acl 0-4 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. Enter all of the profiles and a range. Enter the CAM profile name then the amount to be allotted. The total space allocated must equal 4. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 776
cam-acl Allocate space for IPv6 ACLs. Syntax cam-acl {default | l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10} Parameters default Use the default CAM profile settings, and set the CAM as follows: ● ● ● ● ● l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10 L3 ACL (ipv4acl): 6 L2 ACL(l2acl): 5 IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0 L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1 L2 QoS (l2qos): 1 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. Enter all of the profiles and a range.
PAGE 777
25 IPv6 Basics IPv6 basic commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For information about the Dell EMC Networking OS version and platform that supports IPv6 in each software feature, see the IPv6 Addressing section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 778
Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the S6000. You can partition the LPM table to store IPv6 prefixes greater than /64 mask length.
PAGE 779
clear ipv6 route Clear (refresh) all or a specific route from the IPv6 routing table. Syntax Parameters clear ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] {* | ipv6-address prefix-length} vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to clear the IPv6 routes corresponding to that VRF. * Enter the * to clear (refresh) all routes from the IPv6 routing table. ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format.
PAGE 780
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. maximum dynamic-routes-ipv6 Specify the maximum number of dynamic (protocol) IPv6 routes a VRF can have. Syntax maximum dynamic-routes—ipv6 limit {warn-threshold threshold-value | warningonly} To remove the limit on the maximum number of IPv6 routes used, use the no maximum dynamicroutes-ipv6 command.
PAGE 781
ipv6 address autoconfig Configure IPv6 address auto-configuration for the management interface. Syntax ipv6 address autoconfig To disable the address autoconfig operation on the management interface, use the no ipv6 address autoconfig command. Default Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE (management interface only) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 782
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1(0.0) Updated Usage Information. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 783
To disable IPv6 EUI64 address autoconfiguration, use the no ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefix-length} eui64 command. Parameters ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 prefix in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 784
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. ipv6 flowlabel-zero Configure system to set the flow label field in the packets to zero. Syntax ipv6 flowlabel-zero To disable the 0 from being set in the field and allow the protocol operations to fill the field, use the no ipv6 flowlabel-zero command. Default Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 785
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 8.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ipv6 name-server Enter up to six IPv6 addresses of name servers. The order you enter the addresses determines the order of their use.
PAGE 786
ipv6 nd dad attempts To perform duplicate address detection (DAD) on an interface, configure the number of neighbor solicitation messages that are sent. Syntax ipv6 nd dad attempts {number of attempts} To restore the default value, use the no ipv6 nd dad attempts command. Parameters Default number of attempts Enter the number of attempts to be made to detect a duplicate address. The range is from 0 to 15. Setting the value to 0 disables DAD on the interface.
PAGE 787
Parameters Defaults ipv6-RDNSSaddress Enter the IPv6 Recursive DNS Server’s (RDNSS) address. You can specify up to 4 IPv6 RDNSS server addresses. lifetime Enter the lifetime in seconds. The amount of time the IPv6 host can use the IPv6 RDNSS address for name resolution. The range is 0 to 4294967295 seconds. When you specify the maximum lifetime value of 4294967295 or infinite, the lifetime does not expire. A value of 0 indicates to the host that the RDNSS address should not be used.
PAGE 788
no-rtr-address Enter the keyword no-rtr-address to exclude the full router address from router advertisements (the R bit is not set). off-link Enter the keywords off-link to advertise the prefix without stating to recipients that the prefix is either on-link or off-link. valid-lifetime | infinite Enter the amount of time that the prefix is advertised, or enter infinite for an unlimited amount of time. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 2592000.
PAGE 789
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a tunnel interface, enter the keyword tunnel then the tunnel interface number. The range is from 1 to 16383.
PAGE 790
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When the interface goes down, Dell EMC Networking OS withdraws the route. The route is re-installed, by Dell EMC Networking OS, when the interface comes back up.
PAGE 791
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Because this command is enabled by default, it does not appear in the running configuration. When you disable unicast routing, the no ipv6 unicast-routing command is included in the running configuration.
PAGE 792
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 793
show ipv6 fib stack-unit View all FIB entries. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 fib [vrf vrf-name] stack-unit unit-number [summary | ipv6address] vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display neighbors corresponding to that VRF. slot-number Enter the number of the stack unit. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of entries in IPv6 cam.
PAGE 794
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. ● ipv6 nd dad attempts — configure system to set the flow label field in the packets to zero. show ipv6 interface Display the status of interfaces configured for IPv6.
PAGE 795
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.11(0.0) Updated the command output to include the unicast reverse path forwarding (uRPF) status. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.5(0.1) Added support for IPv6 recursive DNS addresses on the Z9500. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2.(0.0) Added support for tunnel interface. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.
PAGE 796
ff02::2 ff02::1:ff00:aa11 ff02::1:ff8a:e846 ND MTU is 0 ICMP redirects are not sent DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3 ND reachable time is 27550 milliseconds ND base reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 198 to 600 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND advertised hop limit is 64 IPv6 hop limit for originated packets is 64 IPv6 unicast RPF check
PAGE 797
Example (Brief) Example (Tunnel) DellEMC# show ipv6 interface brief GigabitEthernet 1/2 [administratively down/down] fe80::201:e8ff:fea7:497e 2002:1:2::3/96 GigabitEthernet 1/12 [up/up] fe80::201:e8ff:fea7:497e 100::2/64 ManagementEthernet 1/1 [up/up] fe80::201:e8ff:fea7:497e 300::1/64 DellEMC# DellEMC# show ipv6 interface tunnel 1 Tunnel 1 is up, line protocol is up IPV6 is enabled Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fea7:497e Global Unicast address(es): 400::1, subnet is 400::/64 (MANUAL) Remaining lifet
PAGE 798
Usage Information Example The following describes the show ipv6 mld-host command shown in the following example. Field Description Valid MLD Packets The total number of packets received and sent from the last time the elapsed time was cleared. Reports The total number of reports (queries and unsolicited reports generated from joins or leaves) that have been received or sent. Leaves The number of Multicast leaves that have been sent.
PAGE 799
summary Defaults (OPTIONAL) View a brief list of the configured IPv6 routes. none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 800
Field Description ● + = summary routes Example (SSeries) Destination Identifies the route’s destination IPv6 address. Gateway Identifies whether the route is directly connected and on which interface the route is configured. Dist/Metric Identifies if the route has a specified distance or metric. Last Change Identifies when the route was last changed or configured.
PAGE 801
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When you configure trust IPv6 diffserv, matched bytes/packets counters are not incremented in the show qos statistics command.
PAGE 802
26 Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) IS-IS is an interior gateway protocol that uses shortest-path-first algorithm. IS-IS facilitates the communication between open systems, supporting routers passing through both IP and OSI traffic. A router is considered as an intermediate system. Networks are partitioned into manageable routing domains called areas. Intermediate systems send, receive, and forward packets to other routers within their area (Level 1 and Level 1-2 devices).
PAGE 803
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • isis ipv6 metric isis metric isis network point-to-point isis password isis priority is-type log-adjacency-changes lsp-gen-interval lsp-mtu lsp-refresh-interval max-area-addresses max-lsp-lifetime maximum-paths metric-style multi-topology net passive-interface redistribute redistribute bgp redistribute ospf router isis set-overload-bit show config show isis database show isis graceful-restart detail show isis hostname show isis interface show is
PAGE 804
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To perform protocol-support consistency checks on hello packets, use this command. The adjacencycheck is enabled by default.
PAGE 805
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 ISIS support. 6.3.1.0 Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced You cannot disable leaking from Level 1 to Level 2. Also, you cannot enable leaking from Level 2 to Level 1.
PAGE 806
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. To prevent the link state database from receiving incorrect routing information from unauthorized routers, use the area-password command on routers within an area. The configured password injects into Level 1 LSPs, CSNPs, and PSNPs. Related Commands ● domain-password — set the authentication password for a routing domain. ● isis password — configure an authentication password for an interface.
PAGE 807
tag (Optional) Enter an alphanumeric string to specify the IS-IS routing tag area. * Enter the keyword * to clear all IS-IS information and restart the IS-IS process. This command removes IS-IS neighbor information and IS-IS LSP database information and the full SPF calculation is done. database Clears IS-IS LSP database information. traffic Clears IS-IS counters. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 808
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Usage Information To configure a shortcut name that you can use instead of entering a long string of numbers associated with an NSAP address, use this command.
PAGE 809
debug isis adj-packets Enable debugging on adjacency-related activity such as hello packets that are sent and received on IS-IS adjacencies. Syntax debug isis [vrf vrf-name] adj-packets [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis [vrf vrf-name]adj-packets [interface] command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable the debug information on IS-IS for an adjacency tied to that VRF. This command displays the IIH related debug details.
PAGE 810
To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis [vrf vrf—name] updates [interface] command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable the debugging information on IS-IS corresponding to that VRF. This information contains local updates tied to the VRF that you specify. This command displays the local LSP debugging details of the current unit.
PAGE 811
Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable debugging information on ISIS for CSNP/PSNP packets tied to that VRF. The command displays the SNP (CSNP/PSNP) related debugging information. interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type as one of the following: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 812
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 813
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.3.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 814
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 ISIS support. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. When you use this command to redistribute routes into a routing domain, the router becomes an autonomous system (AS) boundary router. An AS boundary router does not always generate a default route into a routing domain. The router still requires its own default route before it can generate one.
PAGE 815
Related Commands Version Description pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced. ● router isis — enter ROUTER mode on the switch. distance Define the administrative distance for learned routes. Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask [prefix-list]] To return to the default values, use the no distance weight command. Parameters Defaults weight The administrative distance value indicates the reliability of a routing information source. The range is from 1 to 255. (A higher relative value indicates lower reliability.
PAGE 816
distribute-list in Filter network prefixes received in updates. Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] To return to the default values, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] command. Parameters prefix-list-name Specify the prefix list to filter prefixes in routing updates. interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type and the interface following: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 817
distribute-list out Suppress network prefixes from being advertised in outbound updates. Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | bgp as number | ospf process-id | rip | static] To return to the default values, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp as number connected | ospf process-id | rip | static] command. Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Specify the prefix list to filter prefixes in routing updates.
PAGE 818
distribute-list redistributed-override Suppress flapping of routes when the same route is redistributed into IS-IS from multiple routers in the network. Syntax distribute-list redistributed-override in To return to the default, use the no distribute-list redistributed-override in command. Defaults none Command Modes ● ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) ● CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 819
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 820
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 6.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Every graceful restart enabled router’s HELLO PDUs includes a restart TLV. This restart enables (re)starting as well as the existing ISIS peers to detect the GR capability of the routers on the connected network.
PAGE 821
Version Description 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. graceful-restart restart-wait Enable the graceful restart maximum wait time before a restarting peer comes up. Syntax NOTE: Set the t3 timer to adjacency on the restarting router when implementing this command. graceful-restart restart-wait seconds To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart restart-wait command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the graceful restart time in seconds. The range is from 5 to 300 seconds.
PAGE 822
Parameters Defaults interval Enter the keyword interval to set the wait time. The range is from 5 to 120 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. retry-times Enter the keywords retry-times to set the number of times the request interval is extended until a CSNP is received from the helping router. The range is from 1 to 10 attempts. The default is 1. See Parameters. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 823
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.
PAGE 824
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The running router sets the remaining time value to the current adjacency hold time. You can override this setting by implementing this command. Override the default restart-wait time by entering the no graceful-restart restart-wait command. When you disable restart-wait, the current adjacency hold time is used.
PAGE 825
Usage Information IS-IS hellos are padded to the full maximum transmission unit (MTU) size. Padding IS-IS Hellos (IIHS) to the full MTU provides early error detection of large frame transmission problems or mismatched MTUs on adjacent interfaces. Related Commands ● isis hello padding — turn ON or OFF hello padding on an interface basis. hostname dynamic Enables dynamic learning of hostnames from routers in the domain and allows the routers to advertise the hostname in LSPs.
PAGE 826
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 827
Usage Information Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Introduced. To assign a network entity title to enable IS-IS, use the net command. This command accepts even if an IP address is not configured. This command is cached in the L3 Manager till the IP address is configured.
PAGE 828
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Configure a network entity title (the net command) to specify the area address and the router system ID. To establish adjacencies and establish dynamic routing, enable routing on one or more interfaces. You can configure only one IS-IS routing process to perform Level 2 routing. A level-1-2 designation performs Level 1 and Level 2 routing at the same time.
PAGE 829
Usage Information Because the default establishes Level 1 and Level 2 adjacencies, you do not need to configure this command. Routers in an IS-IS system must be configured as a Level 1-only, Level 1-2, or Level 2-only system. Only configure interfaces as Level 1 or Level 2 on routers that are between areas (for example, a Level 1-2 router) to prevent the software from sending unused hello packets and wasting bandwidth.
PAGE 830
isis hello-interval Specify the length of time between hello packets sent. Syntax isis hello-interval seconds [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no isis hello-interval [seconds] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters Defaults seconds Allows you to set the length of time between hello packet transmissions. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 10. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Select this value to configure the hello interval for Level 1. This value is the default.
PAGE 831
Parameters Defaults multiplier Specifies an integer that sets the multiplier for the hello holding time. Never configure a hello-multiplier lower than the default (3). The range is from 3 to 1000. The default is 3. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Select this value to configure the hello multiplier independently for Level 1 adjacencies. This value is the default. level-2 (OPTONAL) Select this value to configure the hello multiplier independently for Level 2 adjacencies.
PAGE 832
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000.
PAGE 833
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Dell EMC Networking recommends configuring metrics on all interfaces. Without configuring this command, the IS-IS metrics are similar to hop-count metrics. isis metric Assign a metric to an interface.
PAGE 834
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Dell EMC Networking recommends configuring metrics on all interfaces. Without configuring this command, the IS-IS metrics are similar to hop-count metrics.
PAGE 835
Parameters Defaults encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 to encrypt the password using DES. hmac-md5 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords hmac-md5 to encrypt the password using MD5. password Assign the interface authentication password. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Independently configures the authentication password for Level 1. The router acts as a station router for Level 1 routing. This setting is the default. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Independently configures the authentication password for Level 2.
PAGE 836
level-2 Defaults (OPTIONAL) Specify the priority for Level 2. value = 64; level-1 (if not otherwise specified). Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 837
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 838
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. This command allows you to monitor adjacency state changes, which are useful when you monitor large networks. Messages are logged in the system’s error message facility. lsp-gen-interval Set the minimum interval between successive generations of link-state packets (LSPs).
PAGE 839
Usage Information LSP throttling slows down the frequency at which LSPs are generated during network instability. Even though throttling LSP generations slows down network convergence, no throttling can result in a network not functioning as expected. If network topology is unstable, throttling slows down the scheduling of LSP generations until the topology regains its stability.
PAGE 840
lsp-refresh-interval Set the link state PDU (LSP) refresh interval. LSPs must be refreshed before they expire. When the LSPs are not refreshed after a refresh interval, they are kept in a database until their max-lsp-lifetime reaches zero and then LSPs is purged. Syntax lsp-refresh-interval seconds To restore the default refresh interval, use the no lsp-refresh-interval command. Parameters Defaults seconds The LSP refresh interval, in seconds.
PAGE 841
Parameters Defaults number Set the maximum number of manual area addresses. The range is from 3 to 6. The default is 3. 3 addresses Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 842
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Change the maximum LSP lifetime with this command.
PAGE 843
Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.8.1.0 Added support for multi-topology ISIS. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. metric-style To generate and accept old-style, new-style, or both styles of type, length, and values (TLV), configure a router.
PAGE 844
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. If you enter the metric-style wide command, the Dell EMC Networking OS generates and accepts only new-style TLVs. The router uses less memory and other resources rather than generating both oldstyle and new-style TLVs. The new-style TLVs have wider metric fields than old-style TLVs. When wide transition is configured, narrow metric is sent for the narrow metric TLV and the actual wide metric is sent in wide metric TLV.
PAGE 845
net To configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process, use this mandatory command. If you did not configure a NET, the IS-IS process does not start. Syntax net network-entity-title To remove a net, use the no net network-entity-title command. Parameters Defaults network-entitytitle Specify the area address and system ID for an IS-IS routing process. The first 1 to 13 bytes identify the area address. The next 6 bytes identify the system ID.
PAGE 846
● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
PAGE 847
level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS as Level-1-2 routes. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS as Level 2 routes. This setting is the default. route-map map- (OPTIONAL) If you do not enter the route-map argument, all routes are redistributed. If a map-name value is not specified, no routes are imported.
PAGE 848
redistribute bgp Redistribute routing information from a BGP process. Syntax redistribute bgp AS number [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metricvalue] [metric-type {external| internal}] [route-map map-name] To return to the default values, use the no redistribute bgp command with the appropriate parameters. Parameters AS number Enter a number that corresponds to the autonomous system number. The range is from 1 to 65355.
PAGE 849
Usage Information Example Version Description 7.5.1.0 Added support for IPv6 ISIS. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. BGP to IS-IS redistribution supports “match” options using route maps. You can set the metric value, level, and metric-type of redistributed routes by the redistribution command. You can “set” more advanced options using route maps.
PAGE 850
Command Modes ● ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) ● CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 851
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.
PAGE 852
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.8.1.0 Added support for multi-topology ISIS. 6.3.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 853
clns host ISIS 49.0000.0001.F100.E120.0013.00 log-adjacency-changes net 49.0000.0001.F100.E120.0013.00 ! address-family ipv6 unicast maximum-paths 16 multi-topology transition set-overload-bit spf-interval level-1 100 15 20 spf-interval level-2 120 20 25 exit-address-family Example (AddressFamily_IPv6) The bold section identifies that Multi-Topology IS-IS is enabled in Transition mode.
PAGE 854
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added supported for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 855
Example The bold sections identify that MultiTopology IS-IS is enabled. DellEMC# show isis database IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT/P/OL ISIS.00-00 * 0x00000006 0xCF43 580 0/0/0 IS-IS Level-2 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT/P/OL ISIS.00-00 * 0x00000006 0xCF43 580 0/0/0 ! DellEMC# show isis database detail ISIS.00-00 IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT/P/OL ISIS.
PAGE 856
show isis graceful-restart detail Display detailed IS-IS graceful restart related settings. Syntax show isis [vrf vrf-name] graceful-restart detail Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Parameters Command History Example vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name if the VRf to display IS-IS graceful restart details corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: If you do not specify this option, the IS-IS graceful restart details corresponding to the default VRF are displayed.
PAGE 857
show isis hostname Display IS-IS host names configured or learned on the switch. Syntax Parameters show isis [vrf vrf-name] hostname vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display IS-IS host names corresponding to that VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 858
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example 858 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 859
show isis neighbors Display information about neighboring (adjacent) routers. Syntax Parameters show isis [vrf vrf-name] neighbors [level-1 | level-2] [detail] [interface] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display adjacent router information corresponding to that VRF. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Displays information about Level 1 IS-IS neighbors. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Displays information about Level 2 IS-IS neighbors.
PAGE 860
Example Field Description Interface The interface, slot, and port in which the router was discovered. State The value providing status about the adjacency state. The range is Up and Init. Type This value displays the adjacency type (Layer 2, Layer 2 or both). Priority IS-IS priority the neighbor advertises. The neighbor with highest priority becomes the designated router for the interface. Uptime Displays the interfaces uptime.
PAGE 861
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. The bold section identifies that Multi-Topology IS-IS is enabled. DellEMC# show isis protocol IS-IS Router: System Id: F100.E120.0013 IS-Type: level-1-2 Manual area address(es): 49.0000.0001 Routing for area address(es): 49.
PAGE 862
Usage Information Example 862 Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000. 9.0.2.
PAGE 863
IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: DellEMC# Level-2 LSPs sourced (new/refresh) : 1/3 Level-1 LSPs flooded (sent/rcvd) : 0/0 Level-2 LSPs flooded (sent/rcvd) : 5934/5217 Level-1 LSPs CSNPs (sent/rcvd) : 0/0 Level-2 LSPs CSNPs (sent/rcvd) : 472/238 Level-1 LSPs PSNPs (sent/rcvd) : 0/0 Level-2 LSPs PSNPs (sent/rcvd) : 10/337 Level-1 DR Elections : 4 Level-2 DR Elections : 4 Level-1 SPF Calculations : 0 Level-2 SPF Calculations : 389 LSP checksum errors r
PAGE 864
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for multi-topology ISIS. 7.5.1.0 Added support for SPF Throttling Enhancement. This command spf-interval in CONFIG-ROUTER-ISIS-AF-IPV6 mode is used for IPv6 Multi-Topology route computation only.
PAGE 865
27 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) This section contains commands for Dell EMC Networks’ implementation of the link aggregation control protocol (LACP) for creating dynamic link aggregation groups (LAGs) — known as “port-channels” in the Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For static LAG commands based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications, see Port Channel Commands .
PAGE 866
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show lacp — display the LACP configuration. debug lacp Debug LACP (configuration, events, and so on). Syntax debug lacp [config | events | pdu [interface-type [in | out]]] To disable LACP debugging, use the no [config | events | pdu [interface-type [in | out]]] command.
PAGE 867
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. lacp long-timeout Configure a long timeout period (30 seconds) for an LACP session.
PAGE 868
Usage Information This command applies to dynamic port-channel interfaces only. When applied on a static port-channel, this command has no effect. Related Commands ● show lacp — display the LACP configuration. lacp port-priority To influence which ports will be put in Standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating, configure the port priority.
PAGE 869
Parameters Defaults priority-value Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value number, the lower the priority. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 32768. 32768 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 870
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show lacp — display the LACP information. ● show interfaces port-channel — display information on configured Port Channel groups. show lacp Display the LACP matrix.
PAGE 871
Example (PortChannelNumber) Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show lacp 1 Port-channel 1 admin up, oper up, mode lacp Actor System ID:Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b Partner System ID:Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 872
28 Layer 2 This section describes commands to configure Layer 2 features. Topics: • • • MAC Addressing Commands Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands Far-End Failure Detection (FEFD) MAC Addressing Commands The following commands are related to configuring, managing, and viewing MAC addresses. clear mac-address-table Clear the MAC address table of all MAC address learned dynamically.
PAGE 873
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. mac-address-table aging-time Specify an aging time for MAC addresses to remove from the MAC address table. Syntax Parameters Defaults mac-address-table aging-time seconds seconds Enter either zero (0) or a number as the number of seconds before MAC addresses are relearned. To disable aging of the MAC address table, enter 0.
PAGE 874
mac-address-table disable-learning Disable MAC address learning from LACP or LLDP BPDUs. Syntax mac-address-table disable-learning [lacp | lldp] Parameters Defaults lacp Enter lacp to disable MAC address learning from LACP BPDUs. lldp Enter LLDP to disable MAC address learning from LLDP BPDUs. Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 875
vlan vlan-id Defaults Enter the keyword vlan then a VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 876
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.0) Modified the default option from none to Enabled. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 877
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.
PAGE 878
To return to the default, use the no mac learning-limit learn-limit-violation {log | shutdown} command. Parameters Defaults log Enter the keyword log to generate a syslog message on a learning-limit violation. shutdown Enter the keyword shutdown to shut down the port on a learning-limit violation. None Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 879
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 880
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.
PAGE 881
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. mac port-security Enable or disable the port security feature globally in the system. Syntax mac port-security To disable the port security, use the no mac port-security command.
PAGE 882
● For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 883
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.
PAGE 884
combinations: address/mac-address, interface/interface, or vlan vlan-id. static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to display only those MAC addresses specifically configured on the switch. Optionally, you can also add one of these combinations: address/mac-address, interface/interface, or vlan vlan-id. aging-time Enter the keyword aging-time to display only aging-time information.
PAGE 885
Usage Information The following describes the show mac-address-table command shown in the following example. Column Heading Description VlanId Displays the VLAN ID number. Mac Address Displays the MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. Type Lists whether the MAC address was manually configured (Static), learned dynamically (Dynamic), or associated with a specific port (Sticky). Interface Displays the interface type and slot/port information.
PAGE 886
Parameters vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 887
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.
PAGE 888
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 889
Occasionally, while sending broadcast traffic over multiple Layer 3 VLANs, the VRRP state of a VLAN interface may continually switch between Master and Backup. NOTE: For more information, refer to VLAN Stacking and VLAN-related commands, such as portmode hybrid in the Interfaces chapter. default vlan-id Specify a VLAN as the Default VLAN. Syntax default vlan-id vlan-id To remove the default VLAN status from a VLAN and VLAN 1 does not exist, use the no default vlan-id vlan-id syntax.
PAGE 890
default-vlan disable Disable the default VLAN so that all switchports are placed in the Null VLAN until they are explicitly configured as a member of another VLAN. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148.
PAGE 891
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 892
Example Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)# show config ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)# show vlan Display the current VLAN configurations on the switch.
PAGE 893
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1.(0.0) Updated to support OpenFlow. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Augmented to display PVLAN data for the C-Series and S-Series and revised the output to include the Description field to display a user-entered VLAN description. 7.6.1.
PAGE 894
o - OpenFlow untagged, O - OpenFlow tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged NUM Status Description Q Ports * 1 Inactive 2 Active U Po1(Gi 1/1) T Po20(Gi 1/6), Gi 1/25 T Gi 1/7 3 Active T Po20(Gi 1/6) T Gi 1/7 U Gi 1/1 4 Active U Po2(Gi 1/2) T Po20(Gi 1/6) T Gi 1/7 5 Active T Po20(Gi 1/6) T Gi 1/7 U Gi 1/3 6 Active U Po3(Gi 1/4) T Po20(Gi 1/6) T Gi 1/7 7 Active T Po20(Gi 1/6) T Gi 1/7 U Gi 1/5 P 100 Active T Po1(Gi 1/1) T Gi 1/2 C 10
PAGE 895
Example (Name) Dellconf)# interface vlan 222 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-222)#name test DellEMC(conf-if-vl-222)#do show vlan name test Codes: Q: U x G - * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM Status Description 222 Inactive DellEMC(conf-if-vl-222)# Example (OpenFlow instance) * O O O Related Commands NUM 1 3 6 8 12 Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Q Ports U Gi 1/22 Description Q Ports O Gi 1/10 ● vlan-stack
PAGE 896
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 897
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 898
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series.
PAGE 899
● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 900
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 901
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Legacy E-Series command. Usage Information FEFD disable command on the interface prevents the interface from running FEFD when FEFD is enabled globally. Related Commands ● fefd reset — clear an interface in Err-disabled state. It doesn’t work until the interface is in errdisabled state. ● fefd mode — change FEFD mode on an interface.
PAGE 902
fefd mode Change the FEFD mode on an interface. Syntax fefd mode {normal | aggressive}] To return the FEFD mode to the default of normal, use the no fefd mode command. Parameters Defaults normal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword normal to change the link state to “unknown” when a far-end failure the software detects on that interface. When the interface is placed in “unknown” state, the software brings down the line protocol.
PAGE 903
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 904
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Legacy E-Series command. Related Commands ● fefd — enable far-end failure detection. ● fefd-global — enable FEFD globally on the system. fefd-global Enable FEFD globally on the system.
PAGE 905
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Legacy E-Series command. Usage Information Related Commands If you enter only the fefd-global syntax, the mode is normal and the default interval is 15 seconds. If you disable FEFD globally (no fefd-global), the system does not remove the FEFD interface configuration. ● fefd — enable far-end failure detection. ● fefd-global interval — configure an interval between FEFD control packets.
PAGE 906
Usage Information The following describes the show fefd command shown in the following example. Field Description Interface Displays the interfaces type and number. Mode Displays the mode (aggressive or normal) or NA if the interface contains fefd reset in its configuration. Interval Displays the interval between FEFD packets. State Displays the state of the interface and can be one of the following: ● bi-directional (interface is up, connected and hearing neighbor’s echoes).
PAGE 907
29 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) The link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network management. The Dell EMC Networking operating software implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab.
PAGE 908
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Added the vlan-name option. 7.6.1.
PAGE 909
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. advertise interface-port-desc Advertise port descriptor.
PAGE 910
Defaults systemdescription Enter the keywords system-description to advertise the system description TLVs to the LLDP peer. system-name Enter the keywords system-name to advertise the system name TLVs to the LLDP peer. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.
PAGE 911
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000 and S4810. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. clear lldp counters Clear LLDP transmitting and receiving counters for all physical interfaces or a specific physical interface.
PAGE 912
clear lldp neighbors Clear LLDP neighbor information for all interfaces or a specific interface. Syntax clear lldp neighbors [interface interface] Parameters interface interface Defaults (OPTIONAL)Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 913
Parameters interface interface Defaults Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. all Enter the keyword all to display information on all interfaces. events Enter the keyword events to display major events such as timer events. packet Enter the keyword packet to display information regarding packets coming in or going out.
PAGE 914
Dec 4 22:38:28 : TLV: Chassis ID, Len: 7, Subtype: Mac address (4) Value: 00:a0:c9:00:00:01 Dec 4 22:38:29 : TLV: Port ID, Len: 2, Subtype: Interface name (5) Value: T Dec 4 22:38:29 : TLV: TTL, Len: 2, Value: 300 Dec 4 22:38:29 : TLV: UNKNOWN TLV, ORG_SPEC[aa-bb-cc, 4], Len: 1, Value:a Dec 4 22:38:29 : aa bb cc 04 61 Dec 4 22:38:29 : 40 Dec 4 22:38:29 : TLV: UNKNOWN TLV, Type: 125 Len: 1, Value: @ Dec 4 22:38:29 : TLV: ENDOFPDU, Len: 0 disable Enable or disable LLDP.
PAGE 915
hello Configure the rate at which the LLDP control packets are sent to its peer. Syntax hello seconds To revert to the default, use the no hello seconds command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the rate, in seconds, at which the control packets are sent to its peer. The rate is from 5 to 180 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. 30 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 916
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000 and S4810. To enable LLDP on the management interface, use the no disable command in LLDP-MANAGEMENTINTERFACE mode (conf-lldp-mgmtIf). mode To receive or transmit, set LLDP. Syntax mode {tx | rx} To return to the default, use the no mode command.
PAGE 917
multiplier Set the multiple of the hello timer before LLDP declares the interface dead. Syntax multiplier number To return to the default, use the no multiplier command. Parameters Defaults integer Enter the number of consecutive misses before the LLDP declares the interface dead. The range is from 2 to 10. 4 Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 918
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 919
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Before LLDP can be configured on an interface, it must be enabled globally from CONFIGURATION mode. This command places you in LLDP mode on the interface; it does not enable the protocol.
PAGE 920
Usage Information Example Example (Detail) Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Omitting the keyword detail displays only the remote chassis ID, Port ID, and Dead Interval.
PAGE 921
( 38, 4) ( 48, 4) ( 58, 4) ( 68, 4) ( 78, 4) ( 88, 4) ( 98, 4) (108, 4) (118, ( 39, 4) ( 40, 4) ( 41, 4) ( 42, 4) ( 43, 4) ( 44, 4) ( 45, 4) ( 46, 4) ( 47, 4) ( 49, 4) ( 50, 4) ( 51, 4) ( 52, 4) ( 53, 4) ( 54, 4) ( 55, 4) ( 56, 4) ( 57, 4) ( 59, 4) ( 60, 4) ( 61, 4) ( 62, 4) ( 63, 4) ( 64, 4) ( 65, 4) ( 66, 4) ( 67, 4) ( 69, 4) ( 70, 4) ( 71, 4) ( 72, 4) ( 73, 4) ( 74, 4) ( 75, 4) ( 76, 4) ( 77, 4) ( 79, 4) ( 80, 4) ( 81, 4) ( 82, 4) ( 83, 4) ( 8
PAGE 922
Remote Chassis ID Subtype: Mac address (4) Remote Chassis ID: 4c:76:25:f4:ab:01 Remote Port Subtype: Interface name (5) Remote Port ID: fortyGigE 1/2/8/1 Local Port ID: GigabitEthernet 1/1 Locally assigned remote Neighbor Index: 1 Remote TTL: 300 Information valid for next 201 seconds Time since last information change of this neighbor: 00:01:39 UnknownTLVList: OrgUnknownTLVList: ((00-01-66),127, 4) ((00-01-66),126, 4) ((00-01-66),125, 4) ((00-01-66),124, ((00-01-66),123, 4) ((00-01-66),122, 4) ((00-01-66),
PAGE 923
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 924
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S8420T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 925
As defined by ANSI/TIA-1057, LLDP-MED provides organizationally specific TLVs (Type Length Value), so that endpoint devices and network connectivity devices can advertise their characteristics and configuration information. The Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) for the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) is 00-12-BB. ● LLDP-MED Endpoint Device — any device that is on an IEEE 802 LAN network edge, can communicate using IP, and uses the LLDP-MED framework.
PAGE 926
Related Commands Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. ● protocol lldp (Configuration) — enable LLDP globally. ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors. advertise med guest-voice-signaling To advertise a separate limited voice service for a guest user when the guest voice control packets use a separate network policy than the voice data, configure the system.
PAGE 927
Related Commands ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors. advertise med location-identification To advertise a location identifier, configure the system. Syntax advertise med location-identification {coordinate-based value | civic-based value | ecs-elin value} To return to the default, use the no advertise med location-identification {coordinate-based value | civic-based value | ecs-elin value} command.
PAGE 928
Related Commands ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors. advertise med power-via-mdi To advertise the Extended Power via MDI TLV, configure the system. Syntax advertise med power-via-mdi To return to the default, use the no advertise med power-via-mdi command. Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 929
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. priority-tagged Enter the keywords priority-tagged, the Layer 2 priority, and then the DSCP value. number Defaults Unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 930
Defaults Unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 931
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 932
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series.
PAGE 933
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. ● debug lldp interface — de bug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors.
PAGE 934
Related Commands 934 Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors.
PAGE 935
30 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. Microsoft NLB clustering allows multiple servers running Microsoft Windows to be represented by one MAC and one IP address to provide transparent failover and load-balancing.
PAGE 936
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. vlan vlan-id Defaults Enter the keyword vlan then a VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example (Multicast) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 937
31 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) connects multiple PIM sparse-mode (PIM-SM) domains together. MSDP peers connect using TCP port 639. Peers send keepalives every 60 seconds. A peer connection is reset after 75 seconds if no MSDP packets are received. MSDP connections are parallel with MBGP connections. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports MSDP commands on the S3048–ON platform.
PAGE 938
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced clear ip msdp sa-cache Clears the entire source-active cache, the source-active entries of a particular multicast group, rejected, or local source-active entries.
PAGE 939
Version Description 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added the local option. 7.7.1.0 Added the rejected-sa option. 6.2.1.1 Introduced clear ip msdp statistic Clears the entire source-active cache, the source-active entries of a particular multicast group, rejected, or local source-active entries. Syntax Parameters Defaults clear ip msdp statistic peer peer-address peer Enter the keyword peer to clear the MSDP peer entries. peer-address Enter the IP address of the MSDP peer.
PAGE 940
debug ip msdp Turn on MSDP debugging. Syntax debug ip msdp {event peer address | packet peer address | pim} To turn debugging off, use the no debug ip msdp {event peer address | packet peer address | pim} command. Parameters Defaults event peer address Enter the keyword event then the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). packet peer address Enter the keyword packet then the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).
PAGE 941
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 942
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added the list option and removed the prefix-list option. 7.4.1.0 Introduced If a list is not specified, all SA messages received from the default peer are accepted. You can enter multiple default peer commands.
PAGE 943
ip msdp mesh-group To be a member of a mesh group, configure a peer. Syntax ip msdp mesh-group {name} {peer address} To remove the peer from a mesh group, use the no ip msdp mesh-group {name} {peer address} command. Parameters Defaults name Enter a string of up to 16 characters long for as the mesh group name. peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 944
Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 945
● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 946
ip msdp redistribute Filter local PIM SA entries in the SA cache. SAs which the ACL denies time out and are not refreshed. Until they time out, they continue to reside in the MSDP SA cache. Syntax ip msdp redistribute [list acl-name] Parameters Defaults list acl-name Enter the name of an extended ACL that contains permitted SAs. If you do not use this option, all local entries are blocked. Not configured.
PAGE 947
Defaults peer-address Enter the peer address of the MSDP peer in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). access-list name Enter the name of an extended ACL that contains permitted SAs. If you do not use this option, all local entries are blocked. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 948
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 949
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced ip multicast-msdp Enable MSDP. Syntax ip multicast-msdp To exit MSDP, use the no ip multicast-msdp command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 950
Parameters Defaults peer peer address Enter the keyword peer then the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). sa-cache Enter the keywords sa-cache to display the Source-Active cache. summary Enter the keyword summary to display an MSDP peer summary. Not configured. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 951
00:07:17 DellEMC# Peer1 show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa Display the rejected SAs in the SA cache. Syntax show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 952
00:00:13 225.1.2.17 10.1.1.3 00:00:13 225.1.2.18 10.1.1.4 00:00:13 225.1.2.19 10.1.1.3 952 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.
PAGE 953
32 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link. Similar to the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), which handles multicast group memberships in IPv4 networks, MLD is used for multicast management on IPv6 networks.
PAGE 954
debug ipv6 mld Enable debugging on IPv6 MLD packets. Syntax debug ipv6 mld [vrf vrf-name] {group-address | interface} To turn off debugging, use the no debug ipv6 mld {group-address | interface} command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format. The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
PAGE 955
To return to the default, use the no ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval {milliseconds} command. Parameters Defaults milliseconds Enter the last member query interval in milliseconds. The range is from 100 to 65535. 1000 milliseconds. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(3.
PAGE 956
ipv6 mld version Configure the MLD version on the system. Syntax ipv6 mld version {1 | 2} Defaults MLD version 2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F–ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010.
PAGE 957
Example Dell#show ipv6 mld groups Total Number of Groups: 1 MLD Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Reporter Ff08::12 Vlan 10 MLDv2 Uptime 00:00:12 Expires Last 00:02:05 1::2 show ipv6 mld interface View the configured MLD interfaces. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 mld [vrf vrf-name] interface [interface] vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF.
PAGE 958
interested in this multicast traffic send MLD reports, the switch snoops their report and adds them to the existing forwarding table entry. The switch creates only one entry per VLAN in the forwarding table for each multicast group, for which it snoops an MLD report. clear ipv6 mld snooping groups Clear entries from the group cache table.
PAGE 959
Version Description 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010. ipv6 mld snooping Enable MLD snooping on a VLAN. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping To disable MLD snooping, use the no ipv6 mld snooping command. Defaults Enabled on all VLAN interfaces. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 960
Version Description 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010. ipv6 mld snooping mrouter Configure a Layer 2 port as a multicast router port. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface {interface interface} Parameters interface Enter the keyword interfaceto indicate the next-hop interface to the multicast router.
PAGE 961
show ipv6 mld snooping groups Display the IPv6 MLD snooping group information. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 mld snooping groups [group address] [summary] [interface interface [detail]] group-address (Optional) Enter the multicast group addresss in the X:X:X:X::X format. The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display a summary of groups.
PAGE 962
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Updated the output to show both MLD versions 1 and 2. 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010.
PAGE 963
33 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP), as implemented by the Dell EMC Networking OS, conforms to IEEE 802.1s. This command supports the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 964
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 965
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Introduced. ● protocol spanning-tree mstp — enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode.
PAGE 966
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Introduced. ● max-age — change the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information. ● hello-time — change the time interval between bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). hello-time Set the time interval between generation of MSTB bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).
PAGE 967
Related Commands ● forward-delay — amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State before transitioning to the Forwarding State. ● max-age — change the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information. max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the MSTB. Syntax max-age seconds To return to the default values, use the no max-age command.
PAGE 968
msti Configure multiple spanning tree instance, bridge priority, and one or multiple VLANs mapped to the MST instance. Syntax msti instance {vlan range | bridge-priority priority} To disable mapping or bridge priority, use the no msti instance {vlan range | bridgepriority priority} command. Parameters msti instance Enter the MSTP instance. The range is from zero (0) to 63. vlan range Enter the keyword vlan then the identifier range value. The range is from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 969
name The name you assign to the multiple spanning tree region. Syntax name region-name To remove the region name, use the no name command. Parameters Defaults region-name Enter the MST region name. The range is 32 character limit. No default name. Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 970
Command Modes SPANNING TREE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.
PAGE 971
Usage Information Version Description pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. MSTP is not enabled when you enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. To enable MSTP globally on the switch, enter the no disable command while in MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. For more information about the multiple spanning tree protocol, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 972
Usage Information For two MSTP switches to be within the same MST region, the switches must share the same revision number. Related Commands ● msti — map the VLAN(s) to an MST instance. ● name — assign the region name to the MST region. show config View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are shown. Syntax show config Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History Example 972 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 973
show spanning-tree mst configuration View the multiple spanning tree configuration. Syntax show spanning-tree mst configuration Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 974
brief (Optional) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the MST instance. guard (Optional) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on an MSTP interface and the current port state. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 975
The port is not in the portfast mode Port 89 (GigabitEthernet 2/7) is alternate Discarding Port path cost 0, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.89 Designated root has priority 16384, address 0001.e800.0a:5c Designated bridge has priority 16384, address 0001.e800.0a:5c Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 976
Example (Guard) DellEMC# show spanning-tree msti 5 guard Interface Name Instance Sts Guard type -----------------------------------Gi 1/1 5 INCON(Root) Rootguard Gi 1/2 5 FWD Loopguard Gi 1/3 5 EDS(Shut) Bpduguard spanning-tree Enable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the interface. Syntax spanning-tree To disable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the interface, use the no spanning-tree command.
PAGE 977
spanning-tree msti Configure multiple spanning tree instance cost and priority for an interface. Syntax Parameters spanning-tree msti instance {cost cost | priority priority} msti instance Enter the keyword msti and the MST instance number. The range is from zero (0) to 63. cost cost (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cost then the port cost value. The range is from 1 to 200000.
PAGE 978
tc-flush-standard Enable the MAC address flushing after receiving every topology change notification. Syntax tc-flush-standard To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information 978 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 979
34 Multicast The multicast commands are supported by Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • IPv4 Multicast Commands IPv6 Multicast Commands IPv4 Multicast Commands The following section contains the IPv4 multicast commands. clear ip mroute Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the protocol-independent multicast (PIM) tree information base, use the clear ip pim tib command.
PAGE 980
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● show ip pim tib — show the PIM tree information base. ip mroute Assign a static mroute.
PAGE 981
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.
PAGE 982
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This feature allows you to limit the number of multicast entries on the system. This number is the total of all the multicast entries on all line cards in the system.
PAGE 983
Version Description E-Series legacy command Usage Information After you enable multicast, you can enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. In INTERFACE mode, enter the ip pim sparse-mode command to enable IGMP and PIM on the interface. Related Commands ● ip pim sparse-mode — enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. mtrace Trace a multicast route from the source to the receiver.
PAGE 984
|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/Mask| ----------------------------------------------------------------0 1.1.1.1 --> Destination -1 1.1.1.1 PIM Reached RP/Core 103.103.103.0/24 -2 101.101.101.102 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source -----------------------------------------------------------------The mtrace command traverses the path of the response data block in the reverse direction of the multicast data traffic.
PAGE 985
Version Description E-Series legacy command Example DellEMC# show ip multicast-cam stack-unit 1 port 0 Vrf Id Group Address Source Address Vlan Id L3 Ports ----------------------------------------------------0 224.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 1000 Te 1/10, 0 224.1.1.2 0.0.0.0 1000 Te 1/10, 0 224.1.1.1 165.13.34.5 2000 Te 1/11, IPMC index ------------ L2 Ports ------------ 1 Te 1/3, 1 Te 1/3, 2 Te 1/5, show ip mroute View the multicast routing table.
PAGE 986
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2.(0.
PAGE 987
Vlan 20 (S) Vlan 30 (50.1.1.2, 225.1.1.1), uptime 00:39:33 flags: S Incoming interface: Vlan 10 Spanned outgoing interface list: Vlan 20 (S) Usage Information Example The following describes the show ip mroute command shown in the following example. Field Description (S, G) Displays the forwarding entry in the multicast route table. uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the multicast forwarding table.
PAGE 988
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 989
Related Commands Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the C9000, S3048–ON, S3100, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000– ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON and Z9100–ON. ● show ip pim tib — show the PIM tree information base. ipv6 multicast-routing Enables IPv6 multicast forwarding. Syntax ipv6 multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] To disable multicast forwarding, use the no ipv6 multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] command. Defaults Parameters Disabled.
PAGE 990
the keyword count to display the total number of multicast routes with the spanned IIF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. 9.11.3.0 Example Introduced on the C9000, S3048–ON, S3100, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000– ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON and Z9100–ON.
PAGE 991
9.11.3.0 Example Introduced on the C9000, S3048–ON, S3100, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000– ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON and Z9100–ON. Dell# show ipv6 multicast-cam stack-unit 1 port-set 0 Group Address : ff0e::228:1:1 Source Address : 400::2 VRF : 1 VlanId : 4095 IPMC : 609 L2 Ports : L3 Ports : Te 1/10 show ipv6 rpf View reverse path forwarding. Syntax show ipv6 rpf Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 992
35 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) The neighbor discovery protocol for IPv6 is defined in RFC 2461 as part of the Stateless Address Autoconfiguration protocol. It replaces the Address Resolution Protocol used with IPv4.
PAGE 993
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 994
● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ● For a tunnel interface, enter the keyword tunnel then the tunnel interface number. The range is from 1 to 16383.
PAGE 995
show ipv6 neighbors Display IPv6 discovery information. Entering the command without options shows all IPv6 neighbor addresses stored on the control processor (CP). Syntax Parameters show ipv6 neighbors [vrf vrf-name] [ipv6-address| interface interface] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf and the name of the VRF to display the neighbors corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: If you do not specify this option, neighbors corresponding to the default VRF are displayed.
PAGE 996
Example DellEMC# show ipv6 neighbors IPv6 Address Expires(min) Hardware Address State Interface VLAN CPU --------------------------------------------------------------------100::1 0.03 00:00:00:00:00:22 DELAY Gi 1/12 CP fe80::200:ff:fe00:22 232 00:00:00:00:00:22 STALE Gi 1/12 CP 500::1 0.60 00:01:e8:17:5c:af REACH Gi 1/13 CP fe80::200:ff:fe00:17 232 00:00:00:00:00:29 REACH Gi 1/14 CP 900::1 0.60 00:01:e8:17:5c:b1 STALE Po 23 CP 400::1 0.
PAGE 997
Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9000 switches. device–role Specify the role of the device attached to the port. Syntax device-role {host | router} To reset the device role, use the no device-role {host | router} command.
PAGE 998
To reset the hop count limit, use the no hop-limit {maximum | minimum limit} command. Parameters Defaults maximum limit Enter the keyword maximum then the hop limit value. The range is from 0 to 254. minimum limit Enter the keyword minimum then the hop limit value. The range is from 0 to 254. None Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 999
Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9000 switches. ● show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy — display the configuration applied on all the RA guard policies or a specific RA guard policy.
PAGE 1000
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1001
● ipv6 nd raguard policy policy-name — define the router advertisement (RA) guard policy name and enter the RA guard policy configuration mode. match ra Enable verifying either of the configured source IPv6 address or prefix address or the source MAC address in the inspected messages. If this command is not configured, the verification process is bypassed.
PAGE 1002
Parameters Defaults value Enter the maximum transmission unit value in bytes. The range is from 1,280 to 11,982 bytes. 0 Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1003
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, and Z9000 switches. ● ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands.
PAGE 1004
retrans-time Enable the verification of the configured retransmission timer value in the received RA packets. Syntax retrans—timer value To reset the advertised retransmission interval, use the no retrans-timervalue command. Parameters Defaults value Enter the advertised retransmission time interval in milliseconds. The range is from 100 to 4,294,967,295 milliseconds. None Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1005
Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9000 switches. ● ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands.
PAGE 1006
show config Display the RA guard policy mode configurations. Syntax show config Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.
PAGE 1007
show ipv6 nd ra–guard policy Display the configurations applied on all the RA guard policies or a specific RA guard policy. Syntax Parameter show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name policy policy- name Enter the keyword policy then the policy name. The policy name allows a maximum of 140 characters. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1008
● ipv6 nd raguard attach-policy — apply the IPv6 RA guard to a specific interface. trusted–port Allow bypassing the configured RA guard validation and forwards the RA packets received on the interface, which has the trusted port policy attached. Syntax trusted-port To reset the policy applied to the trusted port, use the no trusted-port command. Defaults None Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1009
36 Object Tracking Object Tracking supports IPv4 and IPv6, and is available on the Dell EMC Networking platforms. Object tracking allows you to define objects of interest, monitor their state, and report to a client when a change in an object’s state occurs.
PAGE 1010
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced. DellEMC# debug track all 04:35:04: %RPM0-P:RP2 %OTM-5-STATE: track 6 - Interface GigabitEthernet 1/2 line-protocol DOWN 04:35:04: %RPM0-P:RP2 %OTM-5-NOTIF: VRRP notification: resource ID 6 DOWN delay Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked object to clients.
PAGE 1011
If the timer expires and an object’s state has changed, a notification is sent to the client. If no delay is configured, a notification is sent immediately after a change in the state of a tracked object is detected. The time delay in communicating a state change is specified in seconds. Related Commands ● track interface ip routing – configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 Layer 3 interface.
PAGE 1012
Parameters object-id (OPTIONAL) Display information on the specified tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
PAGE 1013
show track Display information about tracked objects, including configuration, current tracked state (UP or DOWN), and the clients which are tracking an object. Syntax Parameters show track [object-id [brief] | interface [brief] [vrf vrf-name] | ip route [brief] [vrf vrf-name] | resolution | vrf vrf-name [brief] | brief] object-id (OPTIONAL) Display information on the specified tracked object. The range is 1 to 500.
PAGE 1014
Example Output Description First hop interface Displays the type and slot/port number of the first-hop interface of the tracked route. Tracked by Client that is tracking an object’s state; for example, VRRP. DellEMC# show track Track 1 IP route 23.0.0.
PAGE 1015
To return to the default setting, use the no threshold metric {up number | down number} command. Parameters Defaults up number Enter a number for the UP threshold to be applied to the scaled metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. The default UP threshold is 254. The routing state is UP if the scaled route metric is less than or equal to the UP threshold. down number Enter a number for the DOWN threshold to be applied to the scaled metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. The default DOWN threshold is255.
PAGE 1016
track interface ip routing Configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 Layer 3 interface. Syntax track object-id interface interface ip routing To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. interface Enter one of the following values: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1017
To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. interface Enter one of the following values: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
PAGE 1018
Defaults ip-address/ prefix-len Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format. The valid IPv4 prefix lengths are from /0 to /32. vrf vrf-name (Optional) You can configure a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instance to specify the virtual routing table to which the tracked route belongs. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1019
A tracked IPv4 route is considered to match an entry in the routing table only if the exact IPv4 address and prefix length match a table entry. For example, when configured as a tracked route, 10.0.0.0/24 does not match the routing table entry 10.0.0.0/8. If no route-table entry has the exact IPv4 address and prefix length, the status of the tracked route is considered to be DOWN.
PAGE 1020
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced. Use this command to create an object that tracks the reachability of an IPv4 route. In order for a route’s reachability to be tracked, the route must appear as an entry in the routing table. A tracked IPv4 route is considered to match an entry in the routing table only if the exact IPv4 address and prefix length match a table entry. For example, when configured as a tracked route, 10.0.0.
PAGE 1021
Related Commands ● show track – display information about tracked objects, including configuration, current state, and clients which track the object. ● track ip route metric threshold – configure object tracking on the threshold of an IPv4 route metric. track resolution ip route Configure the protocol-specific resolution value used to scale an IPv4 route metric.
PAGE 1022
Related Commands ● threshold metric – configure the metric threshold used to determine the UP and/or DOWN state of a tracked route. ● track ip route metric threshold – configure object tracking on the threshold of an IPv4 route metric. IPv6 Object Tracking Commands The following section describes the IPv6 object tracking commands.
PAGE 1023
Output Description object is Up/ Down Up/Down state of tracked object; for example, IPv4 interface, reachability or metric threshold of an IP route. number changes, Number of times that the state of the tracked object has changed and the time last change time since the last change in hours:minutes:seconds. Example First hop interface Displays the type and slot/port number of the first-hop interface of the tracked route. Tracked by Client that is tracking an object’s state; for example, VRRP.
PAGE 1024
To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. interface Enter one of the following values: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 1025
ipv6-address/ prefix-len Defaults Enter an IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format. The valid IPv6 prefix lengths are from /0 to / 128. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1026
track ipv6 route reachability Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv6 route. Syntax track object-id ipv6 route ip-address/prefix-len reachability To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters Defaults object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. ipv6-address/ prefix-len Enter an IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format. The valid IPv6 prefix lengths are from /0 to / 128.
PAGE 1027
Parameters Defaults object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. Use the range to 1 to 500. isis resolution- value Enter the resolution used to convert the metric in the routing table for ISIS routes to a scaled metric. ospf resolutionvalue Enter the resolution used to convert the metric in the routing table for OSPF routes to a scaled metric. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1028
37 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open Shortest Path First version 2 for IPv4 is supported on platform. OSPF is an interior gateway protocol (IGP), which means that it distributes routing information between routers in a single autonomous system (AS). OSPF is also a link-state protocol in which all routers contain forwarding tables derived from information about their links to their neighbors.
PAGE 1029
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1030
Version Description 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the remaining DNOS platforms. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1031
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1032
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1033
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1034
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. clear ip ospf statistics Clear the packet statistics in interfaces and neighbors.
PAGE 1035
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. debug ip ospf Display debug information on OSPF.
PAGE 1036
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Added the database-timer rate-limit option for the S4810. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1037
Field Description ● N + (N-bit is set) ● N - (N-bit is not set) ● MC+ (bit used by MOSPF is set and router is able to forward IP multicast packets) ● MC- (bit used by MOSPF is not set and router cannot forward IP multicast packets) ● E + (router is able to accept AS External LSAs) ● E - (router cannot accept AS External LSAs) ● T + (router can support TOS) ● T - (router cannot support TOS) Example hi: Displays the amount of time configured for the HELLO interval.
PAGE 1038
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1039
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1040
Related Commands Version Description 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show ip ospf asbr — display the VLAN configuration. distance Define an administrative distance for particular routes to a specific IP address.
PAGE 1041
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. distance ospf Configure an OSPF distance metric for different types of routes. S3048–ON Syntax distance ospf [external dist3] [inter-area dist2] [intra-area dist1] To delete these settings, use the no distance ospf command. Parameters Defaults external dist3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword external then a number to specify a distance for external type 5 and 7 routes. The range is from 1 to 255.
PAGE 1042
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. To specify a distance for routes learned from other routing domains, use the redistribute command. distribute-list in Apply a filter to incoming routing updates from OSPF to the routing table. S3048–ON Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] To delete a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] command.
PAGE 1043
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. distribute-list out To restrict certain routes destined for the local routing table after the SPF calculation, apply a filter. S3048–ON Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static] To remove a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static] command.
PAGE 1044
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The distribute-list out command applies to routes autonomous system boundary routers (ASBRs) redistributes into OSPF.
PAGE 1045
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on all platforms. The higher this parameter is set, the faster OSPF converge takes place. NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This behavior impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies. Generally, convergence level 1 meets most convergence requirements.
PAGE 1046
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The Helper mode is enabled by default on the device. To enable the restart mode also on the device, you must configure the grace period using this command. After you enable restart mode the router advertises the neighbor as fully adjacent during a restart. graceful-restart helper-reject Specify the OSPF router to not act as a helper during graceful restart.
PAGE 1047
graceful-restart mode Enable the graceful restart mode. S3048–ON Syntax graceful-restart mode [planned-only | unplanned-only] To disable graceful restart mode, use the no graceful-restart mode command. Parameters Defaults planned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords planned-only to indicate graceful restart is supported in a planned restart condition only. unplanned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords unplanned-only to indicate graceful restart is supported in an unplanned restart condition only.
PAGE 1048
Parameters Defaults role helper-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords helper-only to specify the OSPF router is a helper only during graceful restart. role restart-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords restart-only to specify the OSPF router is a restart only during graceful-restart. By default, OSPF routers are both helper and restart routers during a graceful restart. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1049
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1050
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. All neighboring routers in the same network must use the same password to exchange OSPF information.
PAGE 1051
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. If this command is not configured, cost is based on the auto-cost command. When you configure OSPF over multiple vendors, to ensure that all routers use the same cost, use the ip ospf cost command. Otherwise, OSPF routes improperly. ● auto-cost — control how the OSPF interface cost is calculated. ip ospf dead-interval Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router.
PAGE 1052
Related Commands ● ip ospf hello-interval — set the time interval between the hello packets. ip ospf hello-interval Specify the time interval between the hello packets sent on the interface. S3048–ON Syntax ip ospf hello-interval seconds To return to the default value, use the no ip ospf hello-interval command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds for the interval. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 10 seconds.
PAGE 1053
ip ospf message-digest-key Enable OSPF MD5 authentication and send an OSPF message digest key on the interface. S3048–ON Syntax ip ospf message-digest-key keyid md5 key To delete a key, use the no ip ospf message-digest-key keyid command. Parameters Defaults keyid Enter a number as the key ID. The range is from 1 to 255. key Enter a continuous character string as the password. No MD5 authentication is configured.
PAGE 1054
ip ospf mtu-ignore Disable OSPF MTU mismatch detection upon receipt of database description (DBD) packets. S3048–ON Syntax ip ospf mtu-ignore To return to the default, use the no ip ospf mtu-ignore command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1055
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1056
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1057
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Set the time interval to a number large enough to prevent unnecessary retransmissions. ip ospf transmit-delay To send a link state update packet on the interface, set the estimated time elapsed.
PAGE 1058
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. log-adjacency-changes To send a Syslog message about changes in the OSPF adjacency state, set Dell EMC Networking OS. S3048–ON Syntax log-adjacency-changes To disable the Syslog messages, use the no log-adjacency-changes command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History 1058 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1059
maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths. S3048–ON Syntax maximum-paths number To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, use the no maximum-paths command. Parameters Defaults number Specify the number of paths. The range for OSPFv2 is from 1 to 64. The default for OSPFv2 is 4 paths. The range for OSPFv3 is from 1 to 64. The default for OSPFv3 is 8 paths.
PAGE 1060
To disable an OSPF area, use the no network ip-address mask area area-id command. Parameters ip-address Specify a primary or secondary address in dotted decimal format. The primary address is required before adding the secondary address. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format. (/x) area-id Enter the OSPF area ID as either a decimal value or in a valid IP address. Decimal value range is from 0 to 65535. IP address format is dotted decimal format A.B.C.D.
PAGE 1061
passive-interface Suppress both receiving and sending routing updates on an interface. S3048–ON Syntax passive-interface {default | interface} To enable both the receiving and sending routing, use the no passive-interface interface command. To return all OSPF interfaces (current and future) to active, use the no passive-interface default command. Parameters default Enter the keyword default to make all OSPF interfaces (current and future) passive.
PAGE 1062
The default keyword sets all interfaces as passive. You can then configure individual interfaces, where adjacencies are desired, using the no passive-interface interface command. The no form of this command is inserted into the configuration for individual interfaces when the no passiveinterface interface command is issued while passive-interface default is configured.
PAGE 1063
● 1 = OSPF External type 1 ● 2 = OSPF External type 2 route-map map- name tag tag-value Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of the route map. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag then a number. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 1064
Parameters as number Enter the autonomous system number. The range is from 1 to 65535. metric metric- value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then the metric-value number. The range is from 0 to16777214. metric-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords metric-type then one of the following: type-value route-map map- name tag tag-value Defaults ● 1 = for OSPF External type 1 ● 2 = for OSPF External type 2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of the route map.
PAGE 1065
Parameters tag (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the IS-IS routing process. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-1 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-1 routes. level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-1-2 to redistribute both IS-IS Level-1 and Level-2 routes. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-2 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-2 routes. metric metric- value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number. The range is from 0 (zero) to 4294967295.
PAGE 1066
Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter the router ID in the IP address format. None. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1067
Parameters Defaults process-id Enter a number for the OSPF instance. The range is from 1 to 65535. vrf name (Optional) Enter the VRF process identifier to tie the OSPF instance to the VRF. All network commands under this OSPF instance are then tied to the VRF instance. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1068
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
PAGE 1069
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Added output for LSA throttling timers. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.9.1.0 Added support for VRF. 7.8.1.0 Added support of Multi-Process OSPF. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1070
show ip ospf asbr Display all autonomous system boundary router (ASBR) routers visible to OSPF. S3048–ON Syntax show ip ospf [process-id | vrf vrf-name] asbr Parameters Defaults process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1071
RouterID 3.3.3.3 1.1.1.1 DellEMC# Flags -/-/-/ E/-/-/ Cost Nexthop 2 10.0.0.2 0 0.0.0.0 Interface Area Gi 1/1 1 0 show ip ospf database Display all LSA information. If you do not enable OSPF on the switch, no output is generated. S3048–ON Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id [vrf vrf-name] database [database-summary] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
PAGE 1072
Example Field Description Link ID Identifies the router ID. ADV Router Identifies the advertising router’s ID. Age Displays the link state age. Seq# Identifies the link state sequence number. This number allows you to identify old or duplicate link state advertisements. Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSA’s complete contents. Link count Displays the number of interfaces for that router. DellEMC> show ip ospf 1 database OSPF Router with ID (11.1.2.
PAGE 1073
● the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs ● the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs adv-router ipaddress (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router and the ip-address to display only the LSA information about that router. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1074
Example Field Description Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of the LSA’s complete contents. Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA. Network Mask Displays the network mask implemented on the area. TOS Displays the Type of Service (TOS) options. Option 0 is the only option. Metric Displays the LSA metric. DellEMC# show ip ospf 100 database asbr-summary OSPF Router with ID (1.1.1.10) (Process ID 100) Summary Asbr (Area 0.0.0.
PAGE 1075
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1076
Example Field Description Network Mask Displays the network mask implemented on the area. Metrics Type Displays the external type. TOS Displays the Type of Service (TOS) options. Option 0 is the only option. Metric Displays the LSA metric. Forward Address Identifies the address of the forwarding router. Data traffic is forwarded to this router. If the forwarding address is 0.0.0.0, data traffic is forwarded to the originating router.
PAGE 1077
Parameters process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following: ● the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs ● the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs ● the default destination (0.0.0.
PAGE 1078
Example Field Description LS Type Displays the LSA’s type. Link State ID Displays the Link State ID. Advertising Router Identifies the router ID of the LSA’s originating router. Checksum Identifies the link state sequence number. This number enables you to identify old or duplicate LSAs. Length Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSA’s complete contents. Network Mask Displays the length in bytes of the LSA. Attached Router Identifies the IP address of routers attached to the network.
PAGE 1079
vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followeed by the name of the VRF to view NSSA-External LSA information corresponding to the OSPF process that is tied to a specific VRF. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following: ● the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs ● the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs ● the default destination (0.0.0.
PAGE 1080
Parameters process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view opaque-area LSA information corresponding to the OSPF process that is tied to a specific VRF. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 1081
Item Description ● DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can support OSPF over demand circuits. ● E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External LSAs. Example LS Type Displays the LSA’s type. Link State ID Displays the Link State ID. Advertising Router Identifies the advertising router’s ID. Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of the LSA’s complete contents. Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA.
PAGE 1082
adv-router ip- address (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router and the ip-address to display only the LSA information about that router. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1083
adv-router ip- address (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router then the IP address of an Advertising Router to display only the LSA information about that router. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1084
● the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs adv-router ip- address (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router followed by the IP address of an Advertising Router to display only the LSA information about that router. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1085
Example Item Description LS Seq Number Displays the link state sequence number. This number detects duplicate or old LSAs. Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSA’s complete contents. Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA. Number of Links Displays the number of active links to the type of router (Area Border Router or AS Boundary Router) listed in the previous line. Link connected to: Identifies the type of network to which the router is connected.
PAGE 1086
Link connected to: a Stub Network (Link ID) Network/subnet number: 11.1.5.0 --More-Related Commands ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf database summary Display the network summary (type 3) LSA routing information. Syntax show ip ospf [process-id | vrf vrf-name ] database summary [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address] Parameters process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
PAGE 1087
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database summary command shown in the following example. Item Description LS Age Displays the LSA age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router.
PAGE 1088
TOS: 0 Metric: 1 LS age: 7 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Summary Network Link State ID: 192.68.33.0 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10 LS Seq Number: 0x80000016 Checksum: 0x1241 Length: 28 Network Mask: /26 TOS: 0 Metric: 1 DellEMC# Related Commands ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf interface Display the OSPF interfaces configured. If OSPF is not enabled on the switch, no output is generated.
PAGE 1089
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1090
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DROTHER, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.5, Interface address 192.168.0.4 Backup Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.3, Interface address 192.168.0.2 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:08 Neighbor Count is 3, Adjacent neighbor count is 2 Adjacent with neighbor 192.168.253.5 (Designated Router) Adjacent with neighbor 192.168.253.
PAGE 1091
Usage Information Example Version Description pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id neighbor command shown in the following example. Item Description Neighbor ID Displays the neighbor router ID. Pri Displays the priority assigned neighbor. State Displays the OSPF state of the neighbor. Dead Time Displays the expected time until the Dell OS declares the neighbor dead. Address Displays the IP address of the neighbor.
PAGE 1092
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series.
PAGE 1093
global Enter the keyword global to display the packet counts received on all running OSPF interfaces and packet counts OSPF neighbors receive and transmit. interface name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface then one of the following interface keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1094
Row Heading Description Hello Number of OSPF Hello packets. DDiscr Number of database description packets. LSReq Number of link state request packets. LSUpd Number of link state update packets. LSAck Number of link state acknowledgement packets. TxQ-Len The transmission queue length. RxQ-Len The reception queue length. Tx-Mark The highest number mark in the transmission queue. Rx-Mark The highest number mark in the reception queue.
PAGE 1095
OSPF Global Queue Length TxQ-Len RxQ-Len Hello-Q 0 0 LSR-Q 0 0 Other-Q 0 0 Tx-Mark 0 0 0 Rx-Mark 2 0 0 Error packets (Only for RX) Intf-Down Wrong-Len Auth-Err Version No-Buffer Q-OverFlow 0 0 0 0 0 0 Non-Dr Invld-Nbr MD5-Err AreaMis Seq-No Unkown-Pkt 0 0 0 0 0 0 Self-Org 0 Nbr-State 0 Chksum 0 Conf-Issues 0 Socket 0 Error packets (Only for TX) Socket Errors DellEMC# Usage Information The show ip ospf process-id statistics command displays the error packet count received on each interface as: ● ● ●
PAGE 1096
Parameters Defaults process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1097
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1098
Command History Usage Information Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1099
Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv2 Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced the keyword msec. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1100
max-interval Defaults Set the maximum amount of time the system waits before sending the LSA. The range is from 1 to 600,000 milliseconds. ● start-interval: 0 msec ● hold-interval: 5000 msec ● max-interval: 5000 msec Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.
PAGE 1101
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.
PAGE 1102
For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1103
esp encryptionalgorithm Encryption algorithm used with ESP. Valid values are: 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL. For AES-CBC, only the AES-128 and AES-192 ciphers are supported. key-encryptionalgorithm key (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). Text string used in encryption.
PAGE 1104
When you configure encryption for an OSPFv3 area with the area encryption command, you enable both IPsec encryption and authentication. However, when you enable authentication on an area with the area authentication command, you do not enable encryption at the same time. If you have enabled IPsec authentication in an OSPFv3 area with the area authentication command, you cannot use the area encryption command in the area at the same time.
PAGE 1105
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. area range Summarize routes matching an address or mask at an area border router (ABR). Syntax area area-id range ip-address mask [not-advertise] To disable route summarization, use the no area area-id range ip-address mask command.
PAGE 1106
Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.9(0.
PAGE 1107
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Added support for C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. debug ipv6 ospf bfd Display debug information and interface types for bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) on OSPF IPv6 packets.
PAGE 1108
Example Lines Beginning With or Including Description Sending Ver:3 Sending OSPF3 version..
PAGE 1109
Example Example (detail) Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Added support for C-Series. 7.4.1.
PAGE 1110
Lines Beginning With or Including Description ● 5 - link state acknowledgement Length: Displays the OSPFv3 packet length. Router ID: Displays the OSPFv3 router ID. Area ID: Displays the OSPFv3 area ID. Chksum: Displays the OSPFv3 checksum. debug ipv6 ospf packet Display debug information and interface types on OSPF IPv6 packets.
PAGE 1111
Example Example (detail) Version Description 7.8.1.0 Added support for C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series. DellEMC# debug ipv6 ospf packet OSPFv3 packet related debugging is on for all interfaces 05:21:01 : OSPFv3: Sending, Ver:3, Type:1(Hello), Len:40, Router ID:223.255.255.254, Area ID:0, Inst:0, on Po 255 05:21:03 : OSPFv3: Received, Ver:3, Type:1(Hello), Len:40, Router ID:223.255.255.
PAGE 1112
Parameters interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 1113
default-information originate Configure the Dell EMC Networking OS to generate a default external route into an OSPFv3 routing domain. Syntax default-information originate [always] [metric metric-value] [metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] To return to the default values, use the no default-information originate command. Parameters always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to specify that default route information must always be advertised.
PAGE 1114
Parameters Defaults seconds Time duration, in seconds, that specifies the duration of the restart process before OSPFv3 terminates the process. The range is from 40 to 1800 seconds. OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions in a helper-only role. Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1115
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.4.2.2 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T.
PAGE 1116
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series and C-Series. ipv6 ospf authentication Configure an IPsec authentication policy for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6 interface.
PAGE 1117
Usage Information Version Description 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Before you enable IPsec authentication on an OSPFv3 interface, first enable IPv6 unicast routing globally, configure an IPv6 address and enable OSPFv3 on the interface, and assign the interface to an area. An SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router.
PAGE 1118
Usage Information Version Description 9.2.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S4820T, and S4810. This command provides the flexibility to fine-tune the timer values based on individual interface needs when you configure ipv6 ospf BFD in CONFIGURATION mode. Any timer values specified with this command overrides timers set using the bfd all-neighbors command. Using the no form of this command does not disable BFD if you configure BFD in CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 1119
ipv6 ospf dead-interval Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router. After the time interval elapses, the neighboring routers declare the router down. Syntax ipv6 ospf dead-interval seconds To return to the default time interval, use the no ipv6 ospf dead-interval command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the time interval in seconds. The range is from 1 to 65535 seconds. 40 seconds (Ethernet). Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1120
For AES-CBC, only the AES-128 and AES-192 ciphers are supported. key-encryptiontype key (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). Text string used in authentication. The required lengths of a non-encrypted or encrypted key are: 3DES - 48 or 96 hex digits; DES - 16 or 32 hex digits; AES-CBC -32 or 64 hex digits for AES-128 and 48 or 96 hex digits for AES-192.
PAGE 1121
ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject Configure an OSPFv3 interface to not act upon the Grace LSAs that it receives from a restarting OSPFv3 neighbor. Syntax ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject To disable the helper-reject role, enter no ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject. Defaults The helper-reject role is not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1122
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1123
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.
PAGE 1124
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths. Syntax maximum-paths number To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, use the no maximum-paths command. Parameters Defaults number Specify the number of paths.
PAGE 1125
passive-interface Disable (suppress) sending routing updates on an interface. Syntax passive—interface interface To enable sending routing updates on an interface, use the no passive-interface interface command. Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 1126
redistribute Redistribute into OSPFv3. Syntax redistribute {bgp as number}{connected | static}[metric metric-value | metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value] To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute {connected | static} command. Parameters bgp as number Enter the keyword bgp then the autonomous system number. The range is from 1 to 65535. connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute routes from physically connected interfaces.
PAGE 1127
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To redistribute the default route (x:x:x:x::x), use the default-information originate command. router-id Designate a fixed router ID. Syntax router-id ip-address To return to the previous router ID, use the no router-id ip-address command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter the router ID in the dotted decimal format.
PAGE 1128
show crypto ipsec policy Display the configuration of IPsec authentication and encryption policies. Syntax show crypto ipsec policy [name name] Parameters Defaults name name (OPTIONAL) Displays configuration details about a specified policy. No default behavior or values. Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1129
Policy refcount : 1 Inbound ESP SPI : 501 (0x1F5) Outbound ESP SPI : 501 (0x1F5) Inbound ESP Auth Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91e97eb7c0 c30808825fb5 Outbound ESP Auth Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91e97eb7c0 c30808825fb5 Inbound ESP Cipher Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba10345a1039ba8f8a Outbound ESP Cipher Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba10345a1039ba8f8a Transform set : esp-128-aes esp-sha1-hm
PAGE 1130
● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults No default behavior or values. Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1131
inbound ah sas outbound ah sas inbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Command Fields Field Description Interface IPv6 interface Link local address IPv6 address of interface IPSecv6 policy name Name of the IPsec security policy
PAGE 1132
external (OPTIONAL): Enter the keyword external to display the external link states. grace-lsa (OPTIONAL): Enter the keyword grace-lsa to display the Type-11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router. inter-area-prefix (OPTIONAL): Enter the keyword inter-area-prefix to display the inter area prefix link states. inter-area-router (OPTIONAL): Enter the keyword inter-area-router to display the inter area router link states.
PAGE 1133
LS Age : 10 Link State ID : 6.16.192.66 Advertising Router : 100.1.1.1 LS Seq Number : 0x80000001 Checksum : 0x1DF1 Length : 36 Associated Interface : Gi 1/3 Restart Interval : 180 Restart Reason : Switch to Redundant Processor Example (databasesummary) DellEMC# show ipv6 ospf 3 database database-summary OSPFv3 Router with ID (1.1.1.
PAGE 1134
LS Type: OSPFv3 AS external LSA Link State ID: 0.0.0.1 Advertising Router: 10.130.254.101 LS Seq Number: 0x80000001 Checksum: 0xF038 Length: 36 Prefix: 9001::/64 Prefix Options: 0x10 ( DN ) Metric Type: 2 Metric: 20 Example (nssaexternal) DellEMC#show ipv6 ospf 10 database nssa-external OSPFv3 Router with ID (1.1.1.1) (Process ID 10) AS External Link States (Area 1) LS Age: 35 LS Type: OSPFv3 NSSA LSA Link State ID: 0.0.0.1 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.
PAGE 1135
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2.(0.0) Added support for showing BFD status on the S4820T, S4810, and Z9000. 9.1.(0.
PAGE 1136
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults None Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1137
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, Z9500, S6000–ON, C9010, MXL, and FN IOM. Use SNMPv3 context configuration to distinguish between various OSPFv3 VRF instances. DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#snmp context ospf1 DellEMC>show runnig-config ospf ! ipv6 router ospf 10 router-id 10.10.10.
PAGE 1138
Usage Information Example 1138 Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON, S6000, S4820T, S4810, S5000. Setting the delay and holdtime parameters to a low number enables the switch to an alternate path quickly but requires more CPU usage.
PAGE 1139
38 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows you to apply routing policies to specific interfaces. To enable PBR, create a redirect list and apply it to the interface. After the redirect list is applied to the interface, all traffic passing through the interface is subject to the rules defined in the redirect list. PBR is supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1140
Related Commands Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ip redirect-list – enable an IP Redirect List. ip redirect-group Apply a redirect list (policy-based routing) on an interface. You can apply multiple redirect lists to an interface by entering this command multiple times. Syntax ip redirect-group redirect-list-name test [l2–switch] To remove a redirect list from an interface, use the no ip redirect-group name command.
PAGE 1141
The Layer2 PBR option matches the layer2 traffic flow. If you un-configure this option, then the Layer2 traffic is not matched. You can apply the l2–switch option to redirect Layer2 traffic only on a VLAN interface. This VLAN interface must be configured with an IP address for ARP resolution. NOTE: The l2–switch option that redirects Layer2 traffic is applicable only on VLAN interfaces. The Layer3 routing is not affected on the same interface on which Layer2 PBR is applied.
PAGE 1142
permit Configure a permit rule. A permit rule excludes the matching packets from PBR classification and routes them using conventional routing. Syntax permit {ip-protocol-number | protocol-type} {source mask | any | host ipaddress} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operators] To remove the rule, use one of the following: ● If you know the filter sequence number, use the no seq sequence-number syntax command.
PAGE 1143
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 8.4.2.
PAGE 1144
● ● ● ● ● ● = = = = = = acknowledgement finish (no more data from the user) push function reset the connection synchronize sequence number urgent field source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x). any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address.
PAGE 1145
seq Configure a filter with an assigned sequence number for the redirect list.
PAGE 1146
● lt= less than ● range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command parameter.) source port Enter the keywords source-port then the port number to be matched in the ACL rule in the ICAP rule destination-port Enter the keywords destination-port then the port number to be matched in the ACL rule in the ICAP rule. source-portrange Enter the keywords Source-port-range then the range of the start port to end port to be matched in the ACL rule in the ICAP rule.
PAGE 1147
Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000.
PAGE 1148
Example DellEMC# show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Gi 1/32) seq 10 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp any any, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Gi 1/32) seq 15 redirect tunnel 2 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.144, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Gi 1/32) seq 35 redirect 155.1.1.2 track 5 ip 7.7.7.0/24 8.8.8.
PAGE 1149
39 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) The protocol-independent multicast (PIM) commands are supported by the Dell EMC Networking operating software on the platform. The following describes the IPv4 PIM-SIM commands. Topics: • • IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands IPv6 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands The following describes the IPv4 PIM-sparse mode (PIM-SM) commands.
PAGE 1150
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. This command re-applies the RP mapping logic for all the groups learnt by the node. Any stale information corresponding to the existing mapping configuration is updated. The existing BSR cache and the *,G's are deleted only if these entries are stale. clear ip pim tib Clear PIM tree information from the PIM database.
PAGE 1151
If you use this command on a peer VLT node, only the synced routes are deleted from the multicast route table. debug ip pim View IP PIM debugging messages. Syntax debug ip pim [vrf vrf-name] [bsr | events | group | packet [in | out] | register | state | timer [assert | hello | joinprune | register]] To disable PIM debugging, use the no debug ip pim [vrf vrf-name] command or use the undebug all to disable all debugging command.
PAGE 1152
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. ip pim bsr-border Define the border of PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface.
PAGE 1153
ip pim bsr-candidate To join the Bootstrap election process, configure the PIM router. Syntax ip pim [vrf vrf-name] bsr-candidate interface [hash-mask-length] [priority] To return to the default value, use the no ip pim bsr-candidate [vrf vrf-name] command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure the PIM router on a VRF.
PAGE 1154
ip pim dr-priority Change the designated router (DR) priority for the interface. Syntax ip pim dr-priority priority-value To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ip pim dr-priority command. Parameters Defaults priority-value Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number. The range is from 0 to 4294967294. The default is 1. 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1155
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Removed the in and out parameters. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.
PAGE 1156
Example Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced DellEMC(conf)# ip access-list standard map1 DellEMC(config-std-nacl)# permit 224.0.0.
PAGE 1157
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Do not enter this command before creating the access-list. ip pim query-interval Change the frequency of PIM Router-Query messages. Syntax ip pim query-interval seconds To return to the default value, use the no ip pim query-interval seconds command.
PAGE 1158
To return to the default, use the no ip pim [vrf vrf-name] register-filter access-list command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. access-list Defaults Enter the name of an extended access list. Maximum 16 characters. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1159
group-address group-address mask override Enter the keywords group-address then a group-address mask, in dotted decimal format (/xx), to assign that group address to the RP. Enter the keyword override to override the BSR updates with static RP. The override takes effect immediately during enable/disable. NOTE: This option is applicable to multicast group range. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1160
● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port-channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then the port-channel ID. ● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 1161
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1162
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Removed the acl-access-list parameter. Modified the max value of S, G entry second range from 86400 to 65535. Introduced on the S6000ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1163
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. Added support for VRF on S6000, S4810, S4820T, Z9000, Z9500, and S6000–ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1164
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1165
If the PIM DR flood is not disabled (default setting): ● Multicast traffic is transmitted on the egress port towards the PIM DR if the port is not the incoming interface. ● Multicast traffic for an unknown group is sent on the port towards the PIM DR. When DR flooding is disabled, multicast traffic for an unknown group is dropped. show ip pim bsr-router View information on the Bootstrap router.
PAGE 1166
Candidate BSR address: 7.7.7.7, priority: 0, hash mask length: 30 DellEMC# show ip pim interface View information on the interfaces with IP PIM enabled. S3048–ON Syntax show ip pim [vrf vrf-name] interface Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on this VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
PAGE 1167
Field Description Nbr Count Displays the number of PIM neighbors discovered over this interface. Query Intvl Displays the query interval for Router Query messages on that interface (configured with ip pim query-interval command). DR Prio Displays the Designated Router priority value configured on the interface (use the ip pim dr-priority command). DR Displays the IP address of the Designated Router for that interface.
PAGE 1168
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. The following describes the show ip pim neighbor command shown in the following example. Field Description Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the PIM neighbor. Interface List the interface type, with either slot/port information or ID (VLAN or Port Channel), on which the PIM neighbor was found.
PAGE 1169
Example Example (Mapping) Example (Address) Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1170
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1171
Usage Information Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip pim snooping neighbor commands shown in the following example. Field Description Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the neighbor learned through PIM-SM snooping. Interface Displays the VLAN ID number and slot/port on which the PIM-SM-enabled neighbor was discovered.
PAGE 1172
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip pim snooping tib commands shown in the following example. Field Description (S, G) Displays the entry in the PIM multicast snooping database.
PAGE 1173
SGR-P - (S,G,R) Prune Timers: Uptime/Expires * : Inherited port (165.87.1.7, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:00:08, expires 00:02:52, flags: j Incoming interface: Vlan 2, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.0 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 2/11 Upstream Port -/GigabitEthernet 2/13 DR Port -/GigabitEthernet 2/20 RPF 165.87.32.10 00:00:08/00:02:52 show ip pim ssm-range Display the non-default groups added using the SSM range feature.
PAGE 1174
Example Group Address / MaskLen show ip pim summary View information about PIM-SM operation. S3048–ON Syntax show ip pim [vrf vrf-name] summary Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1175
TIB summary: 1/1 (*,G) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC 1/1 (S,G) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC 0/0 (S,G,Rpt) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC 0 0 0 0 PIM nexthops RPs sources Register states Message summary: 2582/2583 Joins sent/received 5/0 Prunes sent/received 0/0 Candidate-RP advertisements sent/received 0/0 BSR messages sent/received 0/0 State-Refresh messages sent/received 0/0 MSDP updates sent/received 0/0 Null Register messages sent/received 0/0 Register-stop messages sent/received Data path event summary: 0 no-cache messag
PAGE 1176
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. The following describes the show ip pim tib command shown in the following example.
PAGE 1177
Vlan 2006 Forward/Sparse 00:06:21/Never (20.10.4.9, 225.1.1.1), uptime 00:06:21, expires 00:02:06, flags: CT Incoming interface: Vlan 2007, RPF neighbor 20.30.124.4 Outgoing interface list: Vlan 2006 Forward/Sparse 00:06:21/Never (*, 225.1.1.2), uptime 00:40:15, expires 00:00:00, RP 20.40.4.4, flags: SCJ Incoming interface: Vlan 2007, RPF neighbor 20.30.124.4 Outgoing interface list: Vlan 2006 Forward/Sparse 00:06:21/Never (20.10.4.9, 225.1.1.
PAGE 1178
clear ipv6 pim tib Clear the IPv6 PIM multicast-routing database (tree information base—TIB). Syntax clear ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] tib [group-address] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
PAGE 1179
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the Z9100-ON, S4048-ON, S6000-ON, S6100-ON, S4048T-ON, S3100, S6010-ON, S3048-ON, and C9010. ipv6 pim bsr-border Define the border of IPv6 PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface. Syntax ipv6 pim bsr-border To return to the default value, use the no ipv6 pim bsr-border command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1180
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3048-ON, S3100 Series, S4048-ON, S4048T-ON, S6000-ON, S6010-ON, S6100-ON, Z9100-ON. ipv6 pim dr-priority Change the designated router (DR) priority for the IPv6 interface.
PAGE 1181
ipv6 pim rp-address Configure a static PIM rendezvous point (RP) address for a group. First-hop routers use this address to send register packets on behalf of the source multicast host. Syntax ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] rp-address address {group-address group-address mask} [override] To remove an RP address, use the no ipv6 pim re-address address group-address mask [override] command.
PAGE 1182
● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port-channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then the port-channel ID. ● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 1183
ipv6 pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer Enable expiry timers globally for all sources. Syntax ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds To disable configured timers and return to default mode, use the no ipv6 pim sparse-mode sgexpiry-timer command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable expiry timer for all sources on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
PAGE 1184
Usage Information PIM leaf routers join the shortest path tree immediately after the first packet arrives from a new source. show ipv6 pim bsr-router View information on the bootstrap router. Syntax show ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] bsr-router Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1185
Example DellEMC#show ipv6 pim interface Interface Ver/ Nbr Query Mode Count Intvl Gi 1/16 v2/S 1 30 Address : fe80::4e76:25ff:fee5:32c2 DR : this router DR Prio 101 Gi 1/17 v2/S 1 30 Address : fe80::4e76:25ff:fee5:32c2 DR : this router 100 Gi 1/19 v2/S 0 30 Address : fe80::4e76:25ff:fee5:32c2 DR : this router 1 show ipv6 pim neighbor Displays IPv6 PIM neighbor information.
PAGE 1186
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format to view RP mappings for a specific group. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command.
PAGE 1187
show ipv6 pim summary View information about PIM-SM operation. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] summary vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1188
show ipv6 pim tib View the IPv6 PIM multicast-routing database (tree information base — tib). Syntax show ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] tib [group-address [source-address]] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view IP PIM debugging messages corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
PAGE 1189
40 Port Monitoring The port monitoring feature allows you to monitor network traffic by forwarding a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port to another port. Important Points to Remember ● Port monitoring is supported on physical ports and logical interfaces, such as port channels and virtual local area networks (VLANs). ● The monitoring (destination, “MG”) and monitored (source, “MD”) ports must be on the same switch.
PAGE 1190
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1191
monitor multicast-queue Configure monitor QoS multicast queue ID. Syntax monitor multicast-queue queue-id To remove the configuration, use the no monitor multicast-queue command. Parameters Defaults queue-id Enter the QoS multicast queue ID. The range is from 0 to 9. queue-id: 0 Enable status: Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Example Command History DellEMC(conf)#monitor multicast-queue 7 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1192
Defaults set ip dscp Configures the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value of the packets in the Encapsulated Remote Switched Port Analyzer (ERSPAN) traffic. To revert to the default value, use the no form of this command. dscp_value DSCP value of the packets in the ERSPAN traffic. The range is from 0 to 63. The default value is 0. set ip ttl Configures the IP time-to-live (TTL) value of the Encapsulated Remote Switched Port Analyzer (ERSPAN) traffic.
PAGE 1193
rate-limit Configure the rate-limit to limit the mirrored packets. Syntax rate-limit limit To remove the limit, use the no rate-limit limit command. Parameters Defaults limit Enter the rate-limit value. The range is from 0 to 40000 Megabits per second. 60 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1194
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1195
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4.0.0 Added support for the RPM / ERPM. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1196
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1197
● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a VLAN interface enter the keyword VLAN followed by a number from 1 to 4094. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. range Enter the keyword range to specify the list of interfaces. any Enter the keyword any to specify all interfaces.
PAGE 1198
Example 1198 Version Description 9.4.0.0 Added support for Source and destination. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1199
41 Private VLAN (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature of the Dell EMC Networking OS is supported on the platforms. Private VLANs extend the Dell EMC Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same private VLAN. A private VLAN partitions a traditional VLAN into subdomains identified by a primary and secondary VLAN pair. The Dell EMC Networking OS private VLAN implementation is based on RFC 3069. For more information, see the following commands.
PAGE 1200
ip local-proxy-arp Enable/disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN. S3048 Syntax [no] ip local-proxy-arp To disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN, use the no ip localproxy-arp command in INTERFACE VLAN mode for the primary VLAN. To disable Layer 3 communication in a particular secondary VLAN, use the no ip local-proxy-arp command in INTERFACE VLAN mode for the selected secondary VLAN.
PAGE 1201
private-vlan mode Set PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary. S3048 Syntax [no] private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary} To remove the PVLAN configuration, use the no private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary} command syntax. Parameters Defaults community Enter the keyword community to set the VLAN as a community VLAN. isolated Enter the keyword isolated to configure the VLAN as an isolated VLAN.
PAGE 1202
private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN. Syntax [no] private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list To remove specific secondary VLANs from the configuration, use the no private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list command syntax. Parameters Defaults vlan-list Enter the list of secondary VLANs to associate with the selected primary VLAN. The list can be in comma-delimited or hyphenated-range format, following the convention for the range input.
PAGE 1203
To remove PVLAN mode from the selected port, use the no switchport mode private-vlan command. Parameters Defaults host Enter the keyword host to configure the selected port or port channel as an isolated interface in a PVLAN. promiscuous Enter the keyword promiscuous to configure the selected port or port channel as an promiscuous interface. trunk Enter the keyword trunk to configure the selected port or port channel as a trunk port in a PVLAN. Disabled.
PAGE 1204
42 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning tree protocol. Dell EMC Networking OS supports PVST+ on the S3048 platform. NOTE: For easier command line entry, the plus (+) sign is not used at the command line.
PAGE 1205
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. pre- 7.7.1.1 Introduced. ● protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Disable PVST+ globally. S3048 Syntax disable To enable PVST+, use the no disable command.
PAGE 1206
Related Commands ● protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter PVST+ mode. extend system-id To augment the Bridge ID with a VLAN ID so that PVST+ differentiate between BPDUs for each VLAN, use extend system ID. If the VLAN receives a BPDU meant for another VLAN, PVST+ does not detect a loop, and both ports can remain in Forwarding state. S3048 Syntax extend system-id Defaults Disabled Command Modes PROTOCOL PVST Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1207
-------------------------------------------------------Gi 0/10 Desg 128.140 128 200000 FWD 0 P2P No Gi 0/12 Dis 128.142 128 200000 DIS 0 P2P No DellEMC(conf-pvst)# Related Commands ● protocol spanning-tree pvst – enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. protocol spanning-tree pvst To enable PVST+ on a device, enter the PVST+ mode. Syntax protocol spanning-tree pvst To disable PVST+, use the disable command.
PAGE 1208
Usage Information After you enable PVST+, the device runs an STP instance for each VLAN it supports. Related Commands ● disable — disables PVST+. ● show spanning-tree pvst — displays the PVST+ configuration. show spanning-tree pvst View the Per-VLAN spanning tree configuration. S3048 Syntax show spanning-tree pvst [vlan vlan-id] [brief] [guard] Parameters vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is 1 to 4094.
PAGE 1209
Usage Information Example (Brief) Version Description 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.4.2.1 Support for the optional guard keyword was added on the C-Series, S-Series, and E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Expanded to display port error disable state (EDS) caused by loopback BPDU inconsistency and Port VLAN ID inconsistency. 6.2.1.1 Introduced.
PAGE 1210
The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 131 (GigabitEthernet 1/1) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.131 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06 Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 1211
spanning-tree pvst Configure a PVST+ interface with one of these settings: edge port with optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard, port disablement if an error condition occurs, port priority or cost for a VLAN range, loop guard, or root guard.
PAGE 1212
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced the loopguard and rootguard options on the E-Series, C-Series, and S-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced the hardware shutdown-on-violation option. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1213
DellEMC# Related Commands ● show spanning-tree pvst — views the PVST+ configuration. spanning-tree pvst err-disable Place ports in an Err-Disabled state if they receive a PVST+ BPDU when they are members an untagged VLAN. S3048 Syntax spanning-tree pvst err-disable cause invalid-pvst-bpdu Defaults Enabled; ports are placed in the Err-Disabled state if they receive a PVST+ BPDU when they are members of an untagged VLAN.
PAGE 1214
tc-flush-standard Enable the MAC address flushing after receiving every topology change notification. S3048 Syntax tc-flush-standard To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1215
bridge-priority value Defaults Enter the keywords bridge-priority then the bridge priority value in increments of 4096. The range is from 0 to 61440. The default is 32768. 32768 Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1216
Defaults 15 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1217
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1218
Related Commands 1218 Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1219
43 Quality of Service (QoS) The Dell EMC Networking OS commands for quality of service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control. QoS commands are not universally supported on all Dell EMC Networking products. Topics: • • • • Global Configuration Commands Per-Port QoS Commands Policy-Based QoS Commands DSCP Color Map Commands Global Configuration Commands There is only one global configuration QoS command.
PAGE 1220
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced. By default, when rate policing and shaping, the system does not include the Preamble, SFD, or the IFG fields. These fields are overhead; only the fields from MAC destination address to the CRC are used for forwarding and are included in these rate metering calculations. Per-Port QoS Commands Per-port QoS (port-based QoS) allows you to define the QoS configuration on a per-physical-port basis.
PAGE 1221
When you set the priority for a port channel, the physical interfaces assigned to the port channel are configured with the same value. You cannot assign the dot1p-priority command to individual interfaces in a port channel. rate police Police the incoming traffic rate on the selected interface. Syntax Parameters Defaults rate police [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burstKB]] [vlan vlan-id] kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps).
PAGE 1222
S-Series On one interface, you can configure the rate police command for a VLAN or you can configure the rate police command for an interface. rate-shape Shape the traffic output on the selected interface. Syntax rate shape [kbps] rate [burst-KB] Parameters Defaults kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). Enter the value in multiples of 64. The range is from 0 to 40000000. The default granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps).
PAGE 1223
Related Commands ● rate-shape — shapes traffic output as part of the designated policy. service-class dot1p-mapping Configure a service-class criterion based on a dot1p value. S3048–ON Syntax Parameters Defaults service-class dot1p-mapping {dot1p0 queue | dot1p1 queue | dot1p2 queue | dot1p3 queue | dot1p4 queue| dot1p5 queue | dot1p6 queue | dot1p7 queue} queue Enter a value from 0 to 7.
PAGE 1224
service-class dynamic dot1p Honor all 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on an interface (from INTERFACE mode) or on all interfaces (from CONFIGURATION mode). A CONFIGURATION mode entry supersedes an INTERFACE mode entry. S3048–ON Syntax service-class dynamic dot1p To return to the default setting, use the no service-class dynamic dot1p command. Defaults All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable the service-class dynamic dot1p command.
PAGE 1225
Usage Information Version Description 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. To honor all incoming 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on the interface, enter this command. By default, this facility is not enabled (that is, the 802.1p markings on incoming traffic are not honored). You can apply this command on both physical interfaces and port channels.
PAGE 1226
Policy-Based QoS Commands Policy-based traffic classification is handled with class maps. These maps classify data traffic into one of eight classes . Dell EMC Networking OS enables you to match multiple class maps and specify multiple match criteria. Policy-based QoS is not supported on logical interfaces, such as port-channels, VLANS, or loopbacks. bandwidth-percentage Assign a percentage of weight to the class/queue.
PAGE 1227
class-map Create/access a class map. Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality-of-service policies to each class. Syntax Parameters Defaults class-map {match-all | match-any} class-map-name [cpu-qos] [layer2] match-all Determines how packets are evaluated when multiple match criteria exist. Enter the keywords match-all to determine that the packets must meet all the match criteria in order to be a member of the class.
PAGE 1228
Related Commands ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ip access-list extended — configures an extended IP ACL. ip access-list standard — configures a standard IP ACL. match ip access-group — configures the match criteria based on the access control list (ACL). match ip precedence — identifies the IP precedence values as match criteria. match ip dscp — configures the match criteria based on the DSCP value. match mac access-group — configures a match criterion for a class map based on the contents of the designated MAC ACL.
PAGE 1229
Related Commands Version Description 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show qos statistics — displays the QoS statistics. description Add a description to the selected policy map or QoS policy. S3048–ON Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the policies (80 characters maximum).
PAGE 1230
match ip access-group Configure match criteria for a class map, based on the access control list (ACL). NOTE: IPv6 class-maps and IP-any class-maps do not match. This condition is true for IPv6 and IP-any class-maps on both ACLs as well as VLANs.
PAGE 1231
Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. For class-map match-any, a maximum of five ACL match criteria are allowed. For class-map match-all, only one ACL match criteria is allowed. Related Commands ● class-map — identifies the class map. match ip dscp Use a differentiated services code point (DSCP) value as a match criteria.
PAGE 1232
Usage Information Version Description 7.7.1.0 Added the keyword multicast ; added the DSCP Marking option support on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series; added support for the DSCP Marking option. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. The match ip dscp and match ip precedence commands are mutually exclusive.
PAGE 1233
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Added support for the ipv6 and ip-any options on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1234
Usage Information Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the seq option for the class-map on all the Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series. To access this command, enter the class-map command.
PAGE 1235
match mac access-group Configure a match criterion for a class map, based on the contents of the designated MAC ACL. Syntax Parameters Defaults [seq sequence number] match mac access-group {mac-acl-name} mac-acl-name Enter a MAC ACL name. Its contents is used as the match criteria in the class map. none Command Modes CLASS-MAP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1236
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the seq option for the class-map on all the Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1237
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 1238
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information An aggregate output QoS policy applies to all outbound port traffic.
PAGE 1239
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Expanded to add support for Layer 2. 6.1.
PAGE 1240
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information To assign traffic to different flows using QoS policy, use the Output Policy map.
PAGE 1241
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Use this command to specify the name of the input QoS policy. Once input policy is specified, rate-police can be defined.
PAGE 1242
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Policy name character limit increased from 16 to 32. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information Use this command to specify the name of the output QoS policy. Once output policy is specified, rateshape, scheduler strict, bandwidth-percentage, and WRED can be defined.
PAGE 1243
Usage Information Version Description 7.4.1.0 and 6.5.3.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command does not uniquely identify a queue, but rather identifies only a set of queues. The WRED curve is applied to all eight egress Multicast queues. Important Points to Remember — Multicast-Bandwidth Option ● A unique multicast weighted fair queuing (WFQ) setting can be applied only on a per port-pipe basis.
PAGE 1244
Usage Information Version Description 7.4.1.0 and 6.5.3.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command does not uniquely identify a queue, but rather identifies only a set of queues. The WRED Curve is applied to all eight ingress Multicast queues. NOTE: The multicast-bandwidth option is not supported on queue ingress. If you attempt to use the multicast-bandwidth option, the following reject error message is generated: % Error:Bandwidth-percent is not allowed for ingress multicast.
PAGE 1245
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information The default burst size is 100Kb. If a different value is required, you must configure the burst size to the required value. Related Commands ● rate police — specifies traffic policing on the selected interface. ● qos-policy-input — creates a QoS output policy. rate-shape Shape traffic output as part of the designated policy.
PAGE 1246
Version Description 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information On 40-port 10G stack-unit if the traffic is shaped between 64 and 1000 Kbs, for some values, the shaped rate is much less than the value configured.You must configure the peak rate and peak burst size using the same value: kilobits or packets per second. Similarly, you must configure the committed rate and committed burst size with the same measurement.
PAGE 1247
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Expanded to add support for Layer 2. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. You can attach a single policy-map to one or more interfaces to specify the service-policy for those interfaces. A policy map attached to an interface can be modified.
PAGE 1248
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information A single policy-map can be attached to one or more interfaces to specify the service-policy for those interfaces. A policy map attached to an interface can be modified. Related Commands ● policy-map-output — creates an output policy map.
PAGE 1249
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information There are eight queues per interface on the S6000 and four queues on the S-Series. This command assigns a class map or QoS policy to different queues.
PAGE 1250
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Added mac-dot1p on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added support for mac-dot1p. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. After the IP DSCP bit is set, other QoS services can then operate on the bit settings. show qos class-map View the current class map information.
PAGE 1251
Example DellEMC# show qos class-map Class-map match-any CM seq 5 Match ip access-group ACL DellEMC# Related Commands ● class-map — identifies the class map. show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Displays the dot1p priority to queue mapping on the switch. Syntax show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Defaults ● dot1p Priority: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ● Queue: 1 0 0 1 2 2 3 3 Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1252
9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. summary To view a policy map interface summary, enter the keyword summary and optionally one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: interface ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1253
3 DellEMC# CM3 q3 Example (IPv6) Example (Summary IPv4) DellEMC# show qos policy-map summary Interface policy-map-input policy-map-output Gi 4/1 PM1 Gi 4/2 PM2 PMOut DellEMC# show qos policy-map-input View the input QoS policy map details. S3048–ON Syntax Parameters show qos policy-map-input [policy-map-name] [class class-map-name] [qospolicy-input qos-policy-name] policy-map-name Enter the policy map name.
PAGE 1254
Example Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added Trust IPv6 diffserv. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1255
Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1256
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show qos qos-policy-input Qos-policy-input QosInput Rate-police 100 50 peak 100 50 Dscp 32 DellEMC# show qos qos-policy-output View the output QoS policy details.
PAGE 1257
Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show qos qos-policy-output Qos-policy-output qosOut Rate-limit 50 50 peak 50 50 Wred yellow 1 Wred green 1 DellEMC# show qos statistics View QoS statistics.
PAGE 1258
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the egress-queue keyword. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.
PAGE 1259
show qos wred-profile View the WRED profile details. Syntax Parameters Defaults show qos wred-profile wred-profile-name wred-profilename Enter the WRED profile name to view the profile details. none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Modified to display the global WRED state. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1260
test cam-usage Check the Input Policy Map configuration for the CAM usage. S3048–ON Syntax test cam-usage service-policy input policy-map stack-unit {[number port-set portpipe number] | [all]} Parameters policy-map Enter the policy map name. stackunit number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit then the stack-unit slot number. port-set portpipe Enter the keywords port-set then the stack-unit port pipe number. The range is number from 0 or 1.
PAGE 1261
Field Description NOTE: The CAM entries reserved for the default rules are not included in the Available CAM column; free entries, from the default rules space, cannot be used as a policy map for the classification rules. Estimated CAM per Port Indicates the number of free CAM entries required (for the classification rules) to apply the input policy map on a single interface.
PAGE 1262
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (config-wred) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1263
fallback Defaults Enter the keyword fallback to classify packets according to their DSCP or dot1p value as a secondary option in case no match occurs against the configured class maps. none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-policy-map-in) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.
PAGE 1264
Table 6. Default Mapping (continued) DSCP/CP hex DSCP Range (XXX) Definition Traditional IP Precedence S6000 Internal Queue ID S-Series Internal Queue ID DSCP/CP Decimal 011XXX AF3 Flash 3 1 16–31 010XXX AF2 Immediate 2 1 16–31 001XXX AF1 Priority 1 0 0–15 000XXX BE (Best Effort) Best Effort 0 0 0–15 wred Designate the WRED profile to yellow or green traffic.
PAGE 1265
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information To assign drop precedence to green or yellow traffic, use this command. If there is no honoring enabled on the input, all the traffic defaults to green drop precedence. Related Commands ● wred-profile — creates a WRED profile and name that profile. ● trust — defines the dynamic classification to trust DSCP.
PAGE 1266
● If neither endpoint is ECN-capable, the packet may be dropped based on the WRED drop probability. This behavior is the identical treatment that a packet receives when WRED is enabled without ECN configured on the router. When you enable wred ecn, and the number of packets in the queue is above the maximum threshold, packets are dropped based on the drop probability. This behavior is the identical treatment a packet receives when WRED is enabled without ECN configured on the router.
PAGE 1267
Usage Information Use the default pre-defined profiles or configure your own profile. You cannot delete the pre-defined profiles or their default values. This command enables WRED configuration mode —(conf-wred). Related Commands ● threshold — specifies the minimum and maximum threshold values of the WRED profile. DSCP Color Map Commands The DSCP color map allows you to set the number of specific DSCP values to yellow or red.
PAGE 1268
● All DSCP values that are not specified as yellow or red are colored green. ● A DSCP value cannot be in both the yellow and red lists. Setting the red or yellow list with any DSCP value that is already in the other list results in an error and no update to that list is made. ● Each color map can only have one list of DSCP values for each color; any DSCP values previously listed for that color that are not in the new DSCP list are colored green.
PAGE 1269
qos dscp-color-policy Associates the DSCP color map profile with an interface so that all IP packets received on it is given a color based on that color map. Syntax dscp-color-policy color-map-profile-name To remove a color policy map profile, use the no dscp-color-policy color-map-profile-name command. Parameters Defaults color-mapprofile-name Enter the color map profile name. The name can have a maximum of 32 characters.
PAGE 1270
Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1271
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. Display all DSCP color maps.
PAGE 1272
44 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Routing information protocol (RIP) is a distance vector routing protocol. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports both RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2). The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of RIP is based on IETF RFCs 2453 and RFC 1058. For more information about configuring RIP, see the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 1273
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1274
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. This command triggers updates of the main RIP routing tables. debug ip rip Examine RIP routing information for troubleshooting. S3048–ON Syntax debug ip rip [interface | database | events [interface] | trigger] To turn off debugging output, use the no debug ip rip command.
PAGE 1275
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. default-information originate Generate a default route for the RIP traffic.
PAGE 1276
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The default route must be present in the switch routing table for the default-information originate command to take effect. default-metric Change the default metric for routes. To ensure that all redistributed routes use the same metric value, use this command with the redistribute command.
PAGE 1277
Related Commands ● redistribute — allows you to redistribute routes learned by other methods. description Enter a description of the RIP routing protocol. S3048–ON Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the RIP protocol (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1278
To return to the default values, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask] command. Parameters Defaults weight Enter a number from 1 to 255 for the weight (for prioritization). The default is 120. ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), of the host or network to receive the new distance metric. mask If you enter an IP address, also enter a mask for that IP address, in either dotted decimal format or /prefix format (/x).
PAGE 1279
● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1280
interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type slot/port as one of the following: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 1281
ip poison-reverse Set the prefix of the RIP routing updates to the RIP infinity value. S3048–ON Syntax ip poison-reverse To disable poison reverse, use the no ip poison-reverse command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1282
2 Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 2 for RIP version 2. RIPv1 and RIPv2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1283
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1284
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1285
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. RIP supports a maximum of 16 ECMP paths. neighbor Define a neighbor router with which to exchange RIP information. S3048–ON Syntax neighbor ip-address To delete a neighbor setting, use the no neighbor ip-address command.
PAGE 1286
Usage Information Related Commands When a neighbor router is identified, unicast data exchanges occur. Multiple neighbor routers are possible. To ensure that only specific interfaces are receiving and sending data, use the passive-interface command with the neighbor command. ● passive-interface — sets the interface to only listen to RIP broadcasts. network Enable RIP for a specified network. To enable RIP on all networks connected to the switch, use this command.
PAGE 1287
offset-list Specify a number to add to the incoming or outgoing route metrics learned using RIP. S3048–ON Syntax offset-list prefix-list-name {in | out} offset [interface] To delete an offset list, use the no offset-list prefix-list-name {in | out} offset [interface] command. Parameters prefix-list-name Enter the name of an established Prefix list to determine which incoming routes are modified.
PAGE 1288
Usage Information When the offset metric is applied to an interface, that value takes precedence over an offset value that is not extended to an interface. Related Commands ● ip prefix-list — enters PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list. output-delay Set the interpacket delay of successive packets to the same neighbor. S3048–ON Syntax output-delay delay To return to the switch software defaults for interpacket delay, use the no output-delay command.
PAGE 1289
passive-interface Suppress routing updates on a specified interface. S3048–ON Syntax passive-interface interface To delete a passive interface, use the no passive-interface interface command. Parameters interface Enter the following information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1290
redistribute Redistribute information from other routing instances. Syntax redistribute {connected | static} To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute {connected | static} command. Parameters Defaults connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes on interfaces is redistributed. static Enter the keyword static to specify that information from static routes is redistributed. Not configured.
PAGE 1291
Parameters tag (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the IS-IS routing process. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-1 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-1 routes. level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-1-2 to redistribute both IS-IS Level-1 and Level-2 routes. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-2 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-2 routes. metric metric- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number as the metric value. The range is from 0 to 16.
PAGE 1292
metric metric- value route-map map- name Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number as the metric value. The range is from 0 to 16. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route map. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1293
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1294
Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# show config ! router rip network 172.31.0.0 passive-interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# show ip rip database Display the routes that RIP learns. If the switch learned no RIP routes, no output is generated.
PAGE 1295
Usage Information Example Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip rip database command shown in the following example. Field Description Total number of routes in RIP database Displays the number of RIP routes stored in the RIP database. 100.10.10.0/24 directly connected Lists the routes directly connected. 150.100.0.0 redistributed Lists the routes learned through redistribution. 209.9.16.0/24...
PAGE 1296
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1297
flush Defaults ● ● ● ● Enter the number of seconds to specify the time interval during which the route is advertised as unreachable. When this interval expires, the route is flushed from the routing table. The flush value should be greater than the update value. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. The default is 240 seconds.
PAGE 1298
Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands 1298 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1299
45 Remote Monitoring (RMON) Dell EMC Networking OS RMON is based on IEEE standards, providing both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring and long-term statistics collection.
PAGE 1300
variable Enter the MIB object to monitor. The variable must be in the SNMP OID format; for example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3. The object type must be a 32-bit integer. interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds. delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table.
PAGE 1301
rmon collection history Enable the RMON MIB history group of statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner name] [buckets number] [interval seconds] To remove a specified RMON history group of statistics collection, use the no rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} command. Parameters controlEntry integer Defaults Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value.
PAGE 1302
rmon collection statistics Enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} [owner name] To remove RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the no rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} command. Parameters controlEntry integer owner name Defaults Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value. Then enter an integer value from 1 to 65535 that identifies the RMON Statistic Table.
PAGE 1303
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to generate an RMON event log. This option sets the eventType to either log or log-and-snmptrap in the RMON event table. The default is None. trap community (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword trap followed by the SNMP community string to generate SNMP traps for an RMON event entry. This option sets the eventType to either snmptrap or log-and-snmptrap in the RMON event table. In addition to the SNMP traps, this option also generates a syslog.
PAGE 1304
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds. delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table.
PAGE 1305
show rmon Display the RMON running status including the memory usage. S3048–ON Syntax show rmon Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
PAGE 1306
show rmon alarms Display the contents of the RMON alarm table. S3048–ON Syntax show rmon alarms [index] [brief] Parameters Defaults index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON alarm table in an easy-to-read format. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Index) Example (Brief) 1306 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1307
-------------------------1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 6 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 7 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 8 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 9 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 10 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 11 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 12 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 13 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 14 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 15 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 16 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 17 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 18 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 19 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 20 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 21 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 22 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 DellEMC# show rmon events Display the contents of the RMON event table.
PAGE 1308
Example (Index) Example (Brief) 1308 Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 111 -> DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 112 log -> DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 113 trap private -> DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 114 log trap public-> options DellEMC(conf)#do show rmon events RMON event entry 111 description: event type: none.
PAGE 1309
21 21 22 22 DellEMC# show rmon hc-alarm Display the contents of RMON High-Capacity alarm table. S3048–ON Syntax Parameters Defaults show rmon hc-alarm [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON High-Capacity alarm table in an easy-to-read format. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Index) This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1310
falling threshold: 300, RMON event index: 4 alarm sampling failed 0 times. alarm owner: alarm storage type: non-volatile. alarm status: OK DellEMC# Example (Brief) DellEMC# show rmon hc-alarm brief index SNMP OID ---------------------------------1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 DellEMC# show rmon history Display the contents of the RMON Ethernet history table.
PAGE 1311
Example (Index) Example (Brief) Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show rmon history 6001 RMON history control entry 6001 interface: ifIndex.
PAGE 1312
Usage Information Example (Index) Example (Brief) Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The log table has a maximum of 500 entries.
PAGE 1313
Example (Index) Example (Brief) Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1314
6003 101236775 6004 101236775 9001 134529054 9002 134529054 9003 134791198 9004 134791198 DellEMC# 1314 Remote Monitoring (RMON) GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet 2/1 2/1 3/2 3/2 3/1 3/1
PAGE 1315
46 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning-tree protocol. The RSTP algorithm configures connectivity throughout a bridged local area network (LAN) that is comprised of LANs interconnected by bridges. Dell EMC Networking OS supports RSTP.
PAGE 1316
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● protocol spanning-tree rstp — enters rapid spanning tree mode. debug spanning-tree rstp Enable debugging of RSTP and view information on the protocol.
PAGE 1317
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1318
Related Commands ● protocol spanning-tree rstp — enters SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Disable RSTP globally on the system. Syntax disable To enable Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, use the no disable command. Defaults RSTP is disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1319
Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 1320
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Added the milli-second option to the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1321
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● forward-delay — changes the wait time before RSTP transitions to the Forwarding state.
PAGE 1322
Usage Information Example Related Commands RSTP is not enabled when you enter RSTP mode. To enable RSTP globally on the system, use the no disable command from RSTP mode. DellEMC(conf)# protocol spanning-tree rstp DellEMC(config-rstp)# no disable ● disable — disables RSTP globally on the system. show config View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are displayed.
PAGE 1323
Parameters brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the RSTP configuration information. guard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on an RSTP interface and the current port state. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example (Brief) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 1324
Name PortID Prio ---------- ------Gi 4/2 128.418 128 Gi 4/1 128.419 128 Gi 4/8 128.426 128 Gi 4/9 128.427 128 Interface Name Role ----------Gi 4/2 Desg Gi 4/1 Desg Gi 4/8 Root Gi 4/9 Altr DellEMC# Example (EDS, LBK) Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID --- ------- -------------------- -------20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e801.6aa8 128.418 20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e801.6aa8 128.419 20000 FWD 20000 8192 0001.e805.e306 128.130 20000 BLK 20000 8192 0001.e805.e306 128.
PAGE 1325
spanning-tree rstp Configure an RSTP interface with one of these settings: port cost, edge port with optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard, port priority, loop guard, or root guard. Syntax Parameters spanning-tree rstp {cost port-cost | edge-port [bpduguard [shutdown-onviolation]] | priority priority | {loopguard | rootguard}} cost port-cost Enter the keyword cost then the port cost value. The range is from 1 to 200000.
PAGE 1326
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Added support for the optional guard keyword on the C-Series, S-Series, and ESeries. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced the hardware shutdown-on-violation options. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added the optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1327
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1328
47 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell EMC Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
PAGE 1329
48 Security The commands in this chapter are available on Dell EMC Networking OS. For configuration details, see the Security section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS implements LEAP with MSCHAP v2 supplicant. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • AAA Accounting Commands Authorization and Privilege Commands Obscure Password Commands Authentication and Password Commands RADIUS Commands TACACS+ Commands Port Authentication (802.
PAGE 1330
commands { level | role role-name } Enter the keyword commands then a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level or enter the keyword role then the role name for accounting of commands executed by a user with that user role. name | default Enter one of the following: ● For name, enter a user-defined name of a list of accounting methods. ● For default, the default accounting methods used.
PAGE 1331
Example (TACACS+) DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting exec default start-stop tacacs+ DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting command 15 default start-stop tacacs+ DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting command role secaadmin default start-stop tacacs+ Example (RADIUS) Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop radius DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting dot1x default stop-only radius ● ● ● ● enable password — changes the password for the enable command.
PAGE 1332
Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● aaa accounting — enables AAA Accounting and creates a record for monitoring the accounting function. aaa accounting suppress Prevent the generation of accounting records of users with the user name value of NULL. Syntax aaa accounting suppress null-username To permit accounting records to users with user name value of NULL, use the no aaa accounting suppress null-username command.
PAGE 1333
aaa radius group Configure the RADIUS server group that is used for Authentication, Authorization and Accounting. Syntax aaa radius group group-name To remove the RADIUS group configuration, use the no aaa radius group group-name command. Parameters Defaults group-name Enter the name of the RADIUS server group. none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1334
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Added support for roles on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Added support for roles on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.
PAGE 1335
Defaults commands { level | role role-name } Enter the keyword commands followed by either a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level, or enter the keyword role then the role name for authorization of commands executed by a user with that user role. method-list Enter a method list that you defined using the aaa accounting exec or aaa accounting commands. none Command Modes LINE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1336
Defaults default Define the default list of authorization methods. local Use the authorization parameters on the system to perform authorization. tacacs+ Use the TACACS+ protocol to perform authorization. none Enter the keyword none to apply no authorization. none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1337
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1338
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Added support for RADIUS.
PAGE 1339
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1340
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Obscure Password Commands To enable the obscure password, use the following commands. service obscure-passwords Enable the obscuring of passwords and keys.
PAGE 1341
verify that you have successfully obscured passwords and keys, use the show running-config command orshow startup-config command. If you are using role-based access control (RBAC), only the system administrator and security administrator roles can enable the service obscure-password command. Related Commands ● show running-config— Display the current configuration and display changes from the default values. ● service password-encryption— Encrypts all passwords configured in the system.
PAGE 1342
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. By default, the Enable password is used.
PAGE 1343
● radius: use the RADIUS servers configured with the radius-server host command. ● tacacs+: use the TACACS+ servers configured with the tacacs-server host command. ... method4 Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter up to four additional methods. In the event of a “no response” from the first method, the system applies the next configured method (up to four configured methods). Not configured (that is, no authentication is performed).
PAGE 1344
After configuring the aaa authentication login command, configure the login authentication command to enable the authentication scheme on terminal lines. Connections to the SSH server work with the following login mechanisms: local, radius, and tacacs. Related Commands ● ● ● ● login authentication — enables AAA login authentication on the terminal lines. password — creates a password. radius-server host — specifies a RADIUS server host. tacacs-server host — specifies a TACACS+ server host.
PAGE 1345
aaa reauthenticate enable Enable re-authentication of user whenever there is a change in the authenticators. Syntax aaa reauthenticate enable To disable the re-authentication option, use the no aaa reauthenticate enable command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.
PAGE 1346
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Changed the maximum length of the password from 32 to 96. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1347
level level (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level then a number as the level of access. The range is from 1 to 15. encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 8 or 0 as the encryption type. Enter 8 to enter the sha256–based hashed password. password Defaults Enter a text string, up to 96 characters long, as the clear text password. No password is configured. level = 15. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1348
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Only Dell EMC Networking Technical Support staff use this command. enable secret Change the password for the enable command.
PAGE 1349
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To control access to command modes, use this command to define a password for a level and use the privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) command.
PAGE 1350
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.6.0.0 Revised introductory and usage guidelines description. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.
PAGE 1351
Version Description 9.13(0.0) Changed the maximum length of the password from 32 to 96. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1352
locking out sessions on the Telnet or SSH sessions for which there has been a consecutive failed login attempts. The console is not locked out. user-lockoutperiod minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword user-lockout-period then the number of minutes. The range is from 1 to 1440 minutes. The default is 0 minutes and the lockout-period is not enabled.
PAGE 1353
Example In the following example, after 5 un-successful login attempts, the session (SSH/TELNET) goes into a locked state for 5 minutes. If all the 10 sessions are locked out with 5 un-successful attempts in each session, no users can login during the lockout-period. DellEMC(conf)# password-attributes max-retry 5 lockout-period 5 Related Commands ● password — specifies a password for users on terminal lines. secure-cli enable Enable the secured CLI mode.
PAGE 1354
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information CAUTION: Encrypting passwords with this command does not provide a high level of security. When the passwords are encrypted, you cannot return them to plain text unless you re-configure them.
PAGE 1355
Example Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show privilege Current privilege level is 15. DellEMC# DellEMC# show privilege Current privilege level is 14. DellEMC# DellEMC# show privilege Current privilege level is 10. DellEMC# Related Commands ● privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) — assign access control to different command modes. show users Allows you to view information on all users logged in to the switch.
PAGE 1356
Usage Information Example Related Commands The following describes the show user command shown in the following example. Field Description (untitled) Indicates with an asterisk (*) which terminal line you are using. Line Displays the terminal lines currently in use. User Displays the user name of all users logged in. Host(s) Displays the terminal line status. Location Displays the IP address of the user.
PAGE 1357
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1358
privilege level Enter the keyword privilege then a number from zero (0) to 15. role role-name Enter the keyword role followed by the role name to associate with that user ID. secret Enter the keyword secret then the encryption type. sha256-password Enter the keyword sha256-password then the encryption-type or the password. Defaults The default encryption type for password option is 0. The default encryption type for secret option is 5. The default encryption type for sha256-password option is 8.
PAGE 1359
● ● ● ● ● Related Commands A A A A A minimum minimum minimum minimum minimum of of of of of eight characters in length one lower case letter (a to z) one upper case letter (A to Z) one numeric character (0 to 9) one special character including a space (" !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~") ● password — specifies a password for users on terminal lines. ● show running-config — views the current configuration. RADIUS Commands The following RADIUS commands are supported by Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1360
ipv6–addr Enter the keyword ipv6–addr to specify the IPv6 address of the DAC. hostname Enter the keyword hostname to enter the name of the host. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to associate a VRF with the client. key (Optional) Enter the keyword key to specify an encryption key. encryption-type (Optional) Enter either 0 or 7 as the encryption type for the specified key. The options are: ● 0 – implies that the key is not encrypted and is stored as clear text.
PAGE 1361
Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3100, S3048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, S6000, Z9100–ON, Z9500, FN-IOM, and MXL. coa-bounce-port Configure NAS to allow or reject the port bounce RADIUS messages from DAC. Syntax coa-bounce-port To remove the port bounce configuration, enter the no coa-bounce-port command. Defaults Enabled.
PAGE 1362
coa-reauthenticate Configure NAS to re-authenticate dot1x user session requests from DAC. Syntax coa-reauthenticate To allow or reject re-authentication requests, enter the no coa-reauthenticate command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ● CONF-DYNAMIC-AUTH Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1363
Version Description pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. da-rsp-timeout Configure timeout value for the back end task to respond to DAC requests. Syntax da-rsp-timeout minutes To undo the configuration, enter the no da-rsp-timeout command. Defaults Parameters 10 Minutes. minutes Enter the time out value. Command Modes ● CONF-DYNAMIC-AUTH Usage Information ● Time for DAS to wait before the back end response is received. Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1364
dynamic-auth-enable Configure NAS to receive and process dynamic authorization messages. Syntax dynamic-auth-enable To stop NAS from receiving and processing dynamic authorization messages, use the no dynamicauth-enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ● CONF-DYNAMIC-AUTH Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1365
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.
PAGE 1366
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION Usage Information ● All dynamic authorization commands are configured by entering this mode. Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.
PAGE 1367
To disable this function or return to the default value, use the no radius-server deadtime command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a number of seconds during which non-responsive RADIUS servers are skipped. The range is from 0 to 2147483647 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. 0 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1368
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series. DellEMC(conf)# radius-server group group1 DellEMC(conf-radius-group)# radius-server host 1.1.1.1 key secret DellEMC(conf-radius-group)# radius-server host 2.2.2.
PAGE 1369
● 0 is the default and means the password is not encrypted and stored as clear text. ● 7 means that the password is encrypted and hidden. Configure this parameter last because leading spaces are ignored. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ● RADIUS SERVER GROUP ● CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.
PAGE 1370
based on the VRF where the 802.1x request is received. As a result, it is possible that both globally configured RADIUS servers as well as the group-configured RADIUS servers (without VRF or default VRF) are used for processing the 802.1x requests that are received at the default VRF. The order in which the RADIUS servers are tried depends on the order in which the RADIUS servers are configured. The RADIUS accounting port acct-port port-number is configurable.
PAGE 1371
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z9000. You can use this command to associate a group of RADIUS servers with a VRF and source interface. You can configure the source interface only with the VRF attribute and source interface is optional with the VRF attributes.
PAGE 1372
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Authentication key length increased to 42 characters. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1373
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● radius-server host — configures a RADIUS host.
PAGE 1374
Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● radius-server host — configure a RADIUS host. rate-limit Configure NAS to allow or reject RADIUS dynamic authorization (DA) packets based on the configurable rate limit value. Syntax rate-limit packets per minute To undo the configuration, enter the no rate-limit command. Defaults Parameters 30 packets per minute.
PAGE 1375
Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3100, S3048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, S6000, Z9100–ON, Z9500, FN-IOM, and MXL. terminate-session Configure NAS to reject dot1x terminate-session requests from DAC. Syntax terminate-session To drop the DM terminate-session requests from DAC, enter the no terminate-session command. Defaults Enabled.
PAGE 1376
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series. If the TACACS group is not configured for Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting, then globally configured TACACS servers are used for the purposes.
PAGE 1377
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ip tacacs source-interface Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for TACACS+ connections. Syntax ip tacacs source-interface interface To delete a source interface, use the no ip tacacs source-interface command.
PAGE 1378
Version Description pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. tacacs-server group Creates a group of TACACS servers. Syntax tacacs-server group group-nameTo delete a group of TACACS servers, use the no tacacsserver group group-name command. Parameters Defaults group-name Enter the name of the TACACS server group. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands 1378 Security This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1379
tacacs-server host Specify a TACACS+ host. Syntax Parameters Defaults tacacs-server host {hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [port number] [timeout seconds] [key key] hostname Enter the name of the TACACS+ server host. ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of the TACACS+ server host. port number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port then a number as the port to be used by the TACACS+ server. The range is from zero (0) to 65535. The default is 49.
PAGE 1380
If you are not configuring the switch as a TACACS+ server, you do not need to configure the port, timeout and key optional parameters. If you do not configure a key, the key assigned in the tacacsserver key command is used. You can use duplicate host names or IP addresses among TACACS groups. However, you cannot use duplicate host names or IP addresses within the same TACACS group. If a VRF is not configured on the TACACS group, then servers configured in the group are considered to be on the default VRF.
PAGE 1381
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Authentication key length increased to 42 characters. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The key configured with this command must match the key configured on the TACACS+ daemon.
PAGE 1382
Usage Information Version Description 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series. You can use this command to associate a group of TACACS servers with a VRF and source interface. You can configure the source interface only with the VRF attribute and source interface is optional with the VRF attributes. If VRF is not configured on the TACACS group, then the group is considered to be on the default VRF. RADIUS groups and VRFs have one-to-one mapping.
PAGE 1383
To disable dot1x on globally, use the no dot1x authentication command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1384
Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● dot1x authentication (Configuration) — enable dot1x globally. dot1x auth-fail-vlan Configure an authentication failure VLAN for users and devices that fail 802.1X authentication.
PAGE 1385
After the authentication VLAN is assigned, the port-state must be toggled to restart authentication. Authentication occurs at the next re-authentication interval (dot1x reauthentication). Related Commands ● dot1x port-control — enables port-control on an interface. ● dot1x guest-vlan — configures a guest VLAN for non-dot1x devices. ● show dot1x interface — displays the 802.1X information on an interface. dot1x auth-server Configure the authentication server to RADIUS.
PAGE 1386
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1387
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.4 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 1388
Related Commands Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● interface range — configure a range of interfaces. dot1x port-control Enable port control on an interface. Syntax dot1x port-control {force-authorized | auto | force-unauthorized} Parameters Defaults force-authorized Enter the keywords force-authorized to forcibly authorize a port. auto Enter the keyword auto to authorize a port based on the 802.1X operation result.
PAGE 1389
To disable quiet time, use the no dot1x quiet-time command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 30. 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1390
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1391
Version Description 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x server-timeout Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the server time-out. Syntax dot1x server-timeout seconds To return to the default, use the no dot1x server-timeout command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a time-out value in seconds. The range is from 1 to 300, where 300 is implementation dependant. The default is 30. 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1392
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1393
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. show dot1x interface Display the 802.1X information on an interface.
PAGE 1394
802.
PAGE 1395
crypto key generate {rsa} Parameters Defaults rsa Enter the keyword rsa then the key size to generate a SSHv2 RSA host keys. The range is from 1024 to 2048 if you did not enable FIPS mode; if you enabled FIPS mode, you can only generate a 2048-bit key. The default is 1024. NOTE: You must have a license to access the FIPS mode. For more information, contact your Dell EMC Networking representative. Key size 1024; if you enable FIPS mode, the key size is 2048.
PAGE 1396
crypto key zeroize rsa Removes the generated RSA host keys and zeroize the key storage location. Syntax crypto key zeroize rsa Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1397
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Debug information includes details for key-exchange, authentication, and established session for each connection.
PAGE 1398
Usage Information To configure the switch as an SCP server, use the ip ssh server command. Related Commands ● ip ssh server — enables the SSH and SCP server on the switch. ip ssh authentication-retries Configure the maximum number of attempts that should be used to authenticate a user. Syntax ip ssh authentication-retries 1-10 Parameters Defaults 1-10 Enter the number of maximum retries to authenticate a user. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 3.
PAGE 1399
Parameters Defaults enable Enter the keyword enable to enable the challenge response authentication for SSHv2. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.
PAGE 1400
● Client-supported cipher list gets preference over the server-supported cipher list in selecting the cipher for the SSH session. ● When the cipher (-c) option is used with the SSH CLI, it overrides the configured or default cipher list. ● When FIPS is enabled or disabled, the client ciphers get default configuration. ip ssh connection-rate-limit Configure the maximum number of incoming SSH connections per minute.
PAGE 1401
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON.
PAGE 1402
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1403
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON, S6000, S6000–ON, S5000, S4810, S4820T, S3048– ON, S4048–ON, MXL, C9010, S3100 series, and Z9100-ON.
PAGE 1404
Usage Information With password authentication enabled, you can authenticate using the local, RADIUS, or TACACS+ password fallback order as configured. ip ssh pub-key-file Specify the file used for host-based authentication. Syntax ip ssh pub-key-file {WORD} Parameters Defaults WORD Enter the file name for the host-based authentication. none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1405
Related Commands ● show ip ssh client-pub-keys — displays the client-public keys used for the host-based authentication. ip ssh rekey Configures the time rekey-interval or volume rekey-limit threshold at which to re-generate the SSH key during an SSH session. Syntax ip ssh rekey [time rekey-interval] [volume rekey-limit] To reset to the default, use no ip ssh rekey [time rekey-interval] [volume rekeylimit] command.
PAGE 1406
Example Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.
PAGE 1407
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.
PAGE 1408
● aes192-cbc ● aes256-cbc ● aes128-ctr ● aes192-ctr ● aes256-ctr mac hmac- algorithm Enter the keyword mac then a space-delimited list of hash message authentication code (HMAC) algorithms supported by the SSH server for keying hashing for the message authentication. The following HMAC algorithms are available: ● hmac-sha1 ● hmac-sha1-96 ● hmac-sha2-256 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmac-sha1-96.
PAGE 1409
● When FIPS is not enabled, the default is hmac-md5,hmac-md5-96,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96,hmacsha2-256. ● When FIPS is enabled, the default is diffie-hellman-group14-sha1. ● When FIPS is not enabled, the default is diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1,diffie-hellman-group1sha1,diffie-hellman-group14-sha1. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1410
To disable the DNS in SSH server configuration, use the no ip ssh server dns enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13.0.
PAGE 1411
If the SSH server is enabled on a VRF with name vrf1, then use the following command to restart the SSH server on a VRF with name vrf2: ip ssh server vrf vrf2. If the SSH server is enabled on a VRF with name vrf1, then use the following command to restart the SSH server on the default VRF: ip ssh server vrf.
PAGE 1412
Usage Information Example The source-interface interface attribute is applicable for both the SSH client as well as the COPY (SCP) commands. Using these attributes the client session tags an error to the user during run time, in case there is a mismatch between this command and the ip ssh vrf command. DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh source-interface gigabitethernet 1/47 DellEMC(conf)#do ssh 10.10.10.2 -l admin DellEMC(conf)#no ip ssh source-interface ip ssh vrf Specify a VRF for an outgoing SSH connections.
PAGE 1413
Parameters Defaults Key Enter the keyword key to display the host public key. mypubkey Enter the keyword mypubkey to display the host public key. rsa Enter the keyword rsa to display the host SSHv2 RSA public key. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.
PAGE 1414
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands 1414 Security This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.11(0.0) Updated the output to include challenge–response–authentication option. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1415
show ip ssh client-pub-keys Display the client public keys used in host-based authentication. Syntax show ip ssh client-pub-keys Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1416
show ip ssh rsa-authentication Display the authorized-keys for the RSA authentication. Syntax show ip ssh rsa-authentication {my-authorized-keys} Parameters Defaults my-authorizedkeys Display the RSA authorized keys. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1417
ssh Open an SSH connection specifying the hostname, username, encryption cipher, HMAC algorithm, port number, and version of the SSH client. Syntax NOTE: Some of the parameters in this command require licensing to access. For more information, contact your Dell EMC Networking representative.
PAGE 1418
-v 2 Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -v then the SSH version 2. The default is the version from the protocol negotiation. As shown in the Parameters section. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Version 1 is deprecated. 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1419
Disabled) to anvltest@10.16.151.48 by default from console anvltest@10.16.151.48's password: Last login: Thu Jan 5 00:17:47 2012 from login-maa-101 [anvltest@dt-maa-linux-1 ~]# exit logout DellEMC# Secure DHCP Commands DHCP as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks. clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the DHCP binding table.
PAGE 1420
vrf Defaults Enter the keyword vrf to include VRF related information in the Option 82. This configuration enables the relay agent to include VRF related information when it forwards the broadcasts from client to DHCP server. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON.
PAGE 1421
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Usage Information When enabled, no learning takes place until you enable snooping on a VLAN. After disabling DHCP Snooping, the binding table is deleted and Option 82, IP Source Guard, and Dynamic ARP Inspection are disabled.
PAGE 1422
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 1423
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1424
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ip dhcp source-address-validation Enable IP source guard. Syntax [no] ip dhcp source-address-validation Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1425
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 1426
Related Commands Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ● clear ip dhcp snooping — clear the contents of the DHCP binding table. Role-Based Access Control Commands With Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), access and authorization is controlled based on a user’s role. Users are granted permissions based on their user roles, not on their individual user ID.
PAGE 1427
2. Configure login authentication on the console. This ensures that all users are properly identified through authentication no matter the access point 3. Specify an authentication method (RADIUS, TACACS+, or Local). 4. Specify authorization method (RADIUS, TACACS+ or Local). 5. Verify the configuration has been applied to the console or VTY line.
PAGE 1428
NOTE: If you are authorized for the EXEC Privilege mode by your role, you do not need to enter an enable password. Related Commands ● enable password — configures a password for the enable command and to access a privilege level. role Changes command permissions for roles.
PAGE 1429
Related Commands ● userrole — creates user roles. show role Display information on permissions assigned to a command, including user role and/or permission level. Syntax Parameters show role mode {mode} {command} command Enter the command’s keywords to assign the command to a certain access level. You can enter one or all of the keywords. mode mode Enter keyword then one of the following modes.
PAGE 1430
show userroles Display information on all defined user roles. Syntax show userroles Example DellEMC# show userroles Role Inheritance netoperator netadmin secadmin sysadmin netoperator testadmin netadmin Modes Exec Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC Exec Config Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1431
To delete a role name, use the no userrole name command. Note that the reserved role names may not be deleted. Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters. It cannot be one of the system defined roles (sysadmin, secadmin, netadmin, netoperator). inherit existing- Enter the inherit keyword then specify the system defined role to inherit permissions from (sysadmin, secadmin, netadmin, netoperator).
PAGE 1432
ICMP Vulnerabilities The internet control message protocol (ICMP) is a network-layer internet protocol that provides message packets to report errors and other information regarding IP packet processing back to the source. Dell EMC Networking OS mainly addresses the following ICMP vulnerabilities: ● ● ● ● ICMP Mask Reply ICMP Timestamp Request ICMP Replies IP ID Values Randomness You can configure the Dell EMC Networking OS to drop ICMP reply messages.
PAGE 1433
The Dell EMC Networking OS does not suppress the following ICMPv6 message types: ● Packet too big (2) ● Echo request (128) ● Multicast listener query (130) ● Multicast listener report (131) ● Multicast listener done (132) ● Router solicitation (133) ● Router advertisement (134) ● Neighbor solicitation (135) ● Neighbor advertisement (136) ● Redirect (137) ● Router renumbering (138) ● MLD v2 listener report (143) ● Duplicate Address Request (157) ● Duplicate Address Confirmation (158) drop icmp Drops the ICM
PAGE 1434
● 0 directs the system to store the password as clear text. ● 7 directs the system to store the password with a dynamic salt. boot-password Defaults Enter the boot access password. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION. Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON.
PAGE 1435
startup-config Defaults Enter the keyword shartup-config to generate the hash checksum for the startup configuration using the MD5, SHA1, or SHA256 algorithm. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, Z9500, C9010, MXL, and FN-IOM.
PAGE 1436
● A minimum of one upper case letter (A to Z) ● A minimum of one numeric character (0 to 9) ● A minimum of one special character including a space (" !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~") If your password does not meet the criteria, the system does not accept your password. If you use encryption type 9, the system stores the clear text password in an inaccessible location on the system. The show running-configuration command does not display the password.
PAGE 1437
Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, Z9500, C9010, MXL, and FN-IOM. Dell EMC Networking OS supports MD5, SHA1, and SHA256.
PAGE 1438
49 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging is composed of virtual local area network (VLAN) Stacking, Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, and Provider Backbone Bridging as described in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide Service Provider Bridging section. This section includes command line information (CLI) for the Dell EMC Networking OS Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT). L2PT enables protocols to tunnel through an 802.1q tunnel. Dell EMC Networking OS supports L2PT on Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1439
Defaults in | out | both Enter the keyword in, out, or both to debug incoming interfaces, outgoing interfaces, or both incoming and outgoing interfaces. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. count value Enter the keyword count then the number of debug outputs. The range is from 1 to 100. Debug disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1440
Example Related Command Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
PAGE 1441
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced Usage Information When you enable VLAN-Stacking, no protocol packets are tunneled. Related Command ● show protocol-tunnel — displays tunneling information for all VLANs.
PAGE 1442
protocol-tunnel rate-limit Enable traffic rate limiting per box. Syntax protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate To reset the rate limit to the default, use the no protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate command. Parameters Defaults rate Enter the rate in frames per second. The range is from 75 to 3000. The default is 75. 75 frames per second. Command Modes CONF-IF-VLAN-STACK Command History Example Related Commands 1442 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1443
show protocol-tunnel Display protocol tunnel information for all or a specified VLAN-Stack VLAN. Syntax Parameters Defaults show protocol-tunnel [vlan vlan-id] vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display information for the one VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Example (Specific VLAN) Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1444
50 sFlow The Dell EMC Networking OS supports sFlow commands. The Dell EMC Networking OS sFlow monitoring system includes an sFlow Agent and an sFlow Collector. ● The sFlow Agent combines the flow samples and interface counters into sFlow datagrams and forwards them to the sFlow Collector. ● The sFlow Collector analyses the sFlow Datagrams received from the different devices and produces a network-wide view of traffic flows.
PAGE 1445
sflow collector Configure a collector device to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. Syntax sflow collector {ip-address | ipv6-address} agent-addr {ip-address | ipv6address} [number [max-datagram-size number]] | [max-datagram-size number] [vrf management] To delete a configured collector, use the no sflow collector {ip-address | ipv6-address} agent-addr {ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [number [max-datagram-size number]] | [max-datagram-size number] [vrf management] command.
PAGE 1446
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Introduced S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Expanded the no form of the command to mirror the syntax used to configure. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. You can configure up to two sFlow collectors (IPv4 or IPv6). If two collectors are configured, traffic samples are sent to both.
PAGE 1447
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information sFlow is disabled by default. In addition to this command, sFlow needs to be enable on individual interfaces where sFlow sampling is desired.
PAGE 1448
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series, Z-Series, and MXL switch. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. Usage Information When you enable ingress sFlow on an interface, flow sampling is done on any incoming traffic.
PAGE 1449
Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information Dell EMC Networking OS enhances the sflow implementation for real time traffic analysis on the E-Series to provide extended gateway information in cases where the destination IP addresses are learned by different routing protocols and for cases where the destination is reachable over ECMP.
PAGE 1450
Parameters Defaults interval value Enter the interval value in seconds. The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds. The default is 20 seconds. 20 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1451
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1452
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1453
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1454
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.
PAGE 1455
51 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Syslog This section contains commands to configure and monitor the simple network management protocol (SNMP) v1/v2/v3 and Syslog. Both features are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • SNMP Commands Syslog Commands SNMP Commands The following SNMP commands are available in the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1456
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1457
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.
PAGE 1458
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Example Related Commands The following Example displays a group named ngroup.
PAGE 1459
UDP-MIB RFC1213-MIB EtherLike-MIB SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB RADIUS-AUTH-CLIENT-MIB SNMP-MPD-MIB RMON-MIB --More— 1.3.6.1.2.1.50 1.3.6.1.2.1.35 1.3.6.1.6.3.10 1.3.6.1.2.1.67.1.2 1.3.6.1.6.3.11 1.3.6.1.2.1.16 show snmp supported-traps Display the list of SNMP traps supported by the platform. Syntax show snmp supported-traps Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1460
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1461
Usage Information Use this command to map SNMP context to a VRF instance within a community in SNMPv2c and SNMPv3. The no version of this command turns off this feature. snmp ifmib ifalias long Display the entire description string through the Interface MIB, which would be truncated otherwise to 63 characters. Syntax snmp ifmib ifalias long Defaults Interface description truncated beyond 63 characters. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1462
snmp-server community Configure a new community string access for SNMPv1 v2 and v3.
PAGE 1463
The security-name parameter maps the community string to an SNMPv3 user/security name as defined by the community MIB. If a community string is configured without a security-name (for example, snmp-server community public ro), the community is mapped to a default security-name/group: ● v1v2creadu / v1v2creadg — maps to a community with ro (read-only) permissions. ● v1v2cwriteu/ v1v2cwriteg — maps to a community with rw (read-write) permissions. The community-name parameter indexes this command.
PAGE 1464
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command snmp-server enable traps Enable SNMP traps.
PAGE 1465
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the following two SNMP notification options: syslog-reachable and syslog-unreachable. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only.
PAGE 1466
vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF that is used to reach the device. NOTE: Use this attribute to specify the VRF that is used by the SNMP engine to reach the device. If no VRF is specified, then the default VRF is used. udp-port port- Enter the keywords udp-port followed by the user datagram protocol (UDP) port number on the remote device. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 162. number engineID Defaults As above.
PAGE 1467
snmp-server group Configure a new SNMP group or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views.
PAGE 1468
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.2 Added support for the access parameter. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1469
NOTE: You can use this attribute to inform the SNMP engine about the vrf instance to be used to reach the corresponding remote host to send Trap or Inform message. If no VRF is specified, then the default VRF is used. traps (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword traps to send trap notifications to the specified host. The default is traps. informs (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword informs to send inform notifications to the specified host. The default is traps.
PAGE 1470
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced MAC address notification traps on all the Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148 and S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1471
To send an inform, use the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Related Commands Configure a remote engine ID. Configure a remote user. Configure a group for this user with access rights. Enable traps. Configure a host to receive informs. ● snmp-server enable traps — enables SNMP traps. ● snmp-server community — configures a new community SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. snmp-server location Configure the location of the SNMP server.
PAGE 1472
snmp-server packetsize Set the largest SNMP packet size permitted. Wen the SNMP server is receiving a request or generating a reply, use the snmpserver packetsize global configuration command. Syntax snmp-server packetsize byte-count Parameters Defaults byte-count Enter one of the following values 8, 16, 24 or 32. Packet sizes are 8000 bytes, 16000 bytes, 32000 bytes, and 64000 bytes. 8 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1473
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults The IP address assigned to the management interface is the default. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1474
Parameters name Enter the name of the user (not to exceed 20 characters), on the host that connects to the agent. group_name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the group. The following groups are created for mapping to read/write community/security-names (defaults): ● v1v2creadu — maps to a community with ro permissions. ● 1v2cwriteu — maps to a community rw permissions.
PAGE 1475
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1476
5009 3 auth md5 authpasswd Related Commands ● show snmp user — displays the information configured on each SNMP user name. snmp-server user (for AES128-CFB Encryption) Specify that AES128-CFB encryption algorithm needs to be used for transmission of SNMP information. The Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Cipher Feedback (CFB) 128-bit encryption algorithm is in compliance with RFC 3826. RFCs for SNMPv3 define two authentication hash algorithms, namely, HMAC-MD5-96 and HMAC-SHA1-96.
PAGE 1477
Usage Information To enable robust, effective protection and security for SNMP packets transferred between the server and the client, you can use the snmp-server user username group groupname 3 auth authentication-type auth-password priv aes128 priv-password to specify that AES128-CFB encryption algorithm needs to be used. You cannot modify the FIPS mode if SNMPv3 users are already configured and present in the system.
PAGE 1478
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Example Related Commands The oid-tree variable is a full sub-tree starting from 1.3.6 and cannot specify the name of a sub-tree or a MIB. The following Example configures a view named rview that allows access to all objects under 1.3.6.1. DellEMC# conf DellEMC#(conf) snmp-server view rview 1.3.6.
PAGE 1479
snmp trap link-status Enable the interface to send SNMP link traps, which indicate whether the interface is up or down. Syntax snmp trap link-status To disable sending link trap messages, use the no snmp trap link-status command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1480
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
PAGE 1481
Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# clear logging auditlog ● show logging auditlog — display the audit log. default logging buffered Return to the default setting for messages logged to the internal buffer. Syntax default logging buffered Defaults size = 40960; level = 7 or debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1482
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1483
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● logging monitor — set the logging monitor parameters. ● terminal monitor — send system messages to the terminal/monitor. default logging trap Return to the default settings for logging messages to the Syslog servers.
PAGE 1484
logging Configure an IP address or host name of a Syslog server where logging messages are sent. Multiple logging servers of both IPv4 and/or IPv6 can be configured. Syntax logging {ip-address | ipv6-address | hostname} {{udp {port}} | {tcp {port}} [vrf vrf-name] To disable logging, use the no logging command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IPv4 address in dotted decimal format. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::X format.
PAGE 1485
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Multiple logging servers of both IPv4 and/or IPv6 can be configured. Related Commands ● logging on — enables the logging asynchronously to logging buffer, console, Syslog server, and terminal lines. ● logging trap — enables logging to the Syslog server based on severity. logging buffered Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer.
PAGE 1486
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information When you decrease the buffer size, all messages stored in the buffer are lost. Increasing the buffer size does not affect messages stored in the buffer. Related Commands ● clear logging — clears the logging buffer.
PAGE 1487
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● clear logging — clears the logging buffer. ● default logging console — returns the logging console parameters to the default setting. ● show logging — displays the logging setting and system messages in the internal buffer. logging extended Logs security and audit events to a system log server.
PAGE 1488
logging facility Configure the Syslog facility used for error messages sent to Syslog servers. Syntax logging facility [facility-type] To return to the default values, use the no logging facility command.
PAGE 1489
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● logging — enables logging to a Syslog server ● logging on — enables logging. logging history Specify which messages are logged to the history table of the switch and the SNMP network management station (if configured).
PAGE 1490
Version Description E-Series legacy command Usage Information When you configure the snmp-server trap-source command, the system messages logged to the history table are also sent to the SNMP network management station. Related Commands ● show logging — displays information logged to the history buffer. logging history size Specify the number of messages stored in the Dell EMC Networking logging history table.
PAGE 1491
logging monitor Specify which messages are logged to Telnet applications. Syntax logging monitor [level] To disable logging to terminal connections, use the no logging monitor command. Parameters Defaults level Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging. The default is 7 or debugging. 7 or debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1492
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1493
● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1494
all Enter the keyword all to turn off all. limit number-of- Enter the keyword limit then the number of buffers to be queued for the terminal after which new messages are dropped. The range is from 20 to 300. The default is 20. buffers Defaults Disabled. If enabled without the level or number-of-buffers options specified, level = 2 and number-of-buffers = 20 are the defaults. Command Modes LINE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1495
Defaults 6 or informational Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1496
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL. To display syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format, use the log version command in configuration mode. By default, the system log version is set to 0.
PAGE 1497
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1498
Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1499
Example Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 1500
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1501
52 SNMP Traps This section lists the traps sent by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Each trap is listed by the fields Trap Type, Trap Name, Object Name, and MIB file. Table 9. SNMP Trap List TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 1 TR_COLD_START 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 COLDSTART rfc3418.mib SNMP COLD_START trap sent. 2 TR_WARM_START 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 WARMSTART rfc3418.mib SNMP WARM_START trap sent. 3 TR_LINK_DOWN 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 LINKDOWN rfc3418.
PAGE 1502
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 19 TR_CHM_RPM_U P 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.5 dellNetSysAlarmRp mUp DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The primary RPM generate this trap when the primary RPM or the secondary RPM is up and running. 20 TR_CHM_RPM_D OWN 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.6 dellNetSysAlarmRp mDown DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
PAGE 1503
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation the minor threshold. 28 TR_CHM_FANTRA 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 Y_BAD_CLR 6.1.5.1.14 dellNetSysAlarmFa nTrayClear DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The driver/agent generate this trap when a fan tray is now operational. 29 TR_CHM_MIN_FA NBAD_CLR 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.15 dellNetSysAlarmMi norFanBadClear DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
PAGE 1504
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME 42 Object Name MIB File Explanation TR_STP_NEW_RO 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1 OT newRoot BRIDGE-MIB.mib 802.1d new root trap support. 43 TR_STP_TOPOLO GY_CHANGE topologyChange BRIDGE-MIB.mib 802.1d topology change trap support. 44 TR_MSTP_NEW_R 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.20. OOT_BRIDGE 2.0.1 Not Available Not Available MSTP Not Supporting 45 TR_MSTP_NEW_R 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.20. OOT_PORT 2.0.
PAGE 1505
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation type. Implementation of this trap is optional 55 TR_VRRPV3_LEAV 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 E_MASTER 6.1.5.1.44 dellNetSysAlarmVrr DELLpGoMaster NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The VRRP generate this trap when it become a backup 56 TR_VRRPV3_GIVE UP_MASTER dellNetSysAlarmVrr DELLpGiveupMaster NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
PAGE 1506
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation MEP has a persistent defect, it may or may not generate a Fault Alarm to warn the system administrator of the problem, as controlled by the MEP Fault Notification Generator State Machine and associated Managed Objects. If a defect with a higher priority is raised after a Fault Alarm has been issued, another Fault Alarm is issued.
PAGE 1507
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation index into the MEP table (dot1agCfmMepTa ble). 62 TR_EOAM_THRSH 1.3.6.1.2.1.158.0.1 LD_EVT dot3OamThreshold Event stdeoam.mib "A dot3OamThreshold Event notification is sent when a local or remote threshold crossing event is detected.
PAGE 1508
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation detected by the reception of an Ethernet OAM Event Notification OAMPDU that indicates a nonthreshold crossing event. This notification should not be sent more than once per second. The OAM entity can be derived from extracting the ifIndex from the variable bindings. The objects in the notification correspond to the values in a row instance of the dot3OamEventLog Table.
PAGE 1509
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 68 TR_FIPS_ENODE_ DROP 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 2.4.0.5 dellNetENodeDrop pedTrap DELLNETWORKINGFIPSNOOPINGMIB.mib This trap is sent when a new ENode discovered is dropped, as the maximum allowed ENodes limit in the system is already reached 69 TR_FIPS_SESSION 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 _DROP 2.4.0.6 dellNetSessionReq uestDroppedTrap DELLNETWORKINGFIPSNOOPINGMIB.
PAGE 1510
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation dellNetETSGlobalE nableTrap is enabled to send the trap for Peer Up or Peer Down 74 TR_ETS_OPER_ST 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.15 dellNetETSPortDcb DELLATE_CHANGE .4.0.4 xOperStateTrap NETWORKINGDCB-MIB.mib This trap is generated in the following conditions.
PAGE 1511
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation enabled to send the trap for Peer Up or Peer Down 78 TR_PFC_OPER_S TATE_CHANGE 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.15 dellNetPFCPortDcb DELL.4.0.8 xOperStateTrap NETWORKINGDCB-MIB.mib This trap is generated in the following conditions. Whenever there is a change in the PFC Operational State and the dellNetPFCGlobalE nableTrap is enabled to send the trap for PFC state machine state change 79 TR_MPLS_TUNNE L_UP 1.3.6.
PAGE 1512
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 92 TR_CHM_MIN_AL ARM_PS_CLR 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.19 dellNetSysAlarmMi norPSClr DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The agent generate this trap when a power supply minor alarm is cleared. 93 TR_CHM_MIN_FA NBAD 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.20 dellNetSysAlarmMi norFanBad DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The agent generate this trap when fan is bad. 94 TR_SYSADM_CPU _THRESHOLD 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.
PAGE 1513
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation remote systems table maintenance polls. Note that transmission of lldpRemTablesChan ge notifications are throttled by the agent, as specified by the 'lldpNotificationInte rval' object. 103 TR_LLDP_MED_T OPOLOGY_CHAN GE 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.47 lldpXMedTopology 95.0.1 ChangeDetected lldp-ext-med.
PAGE 1514
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation configured for sending SNMP traps. 108 TR_RMON_HC_RI SING_THRESHOL D 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.29.2.0. hcRisingAlarm 1 rfc3434.mib The SNMP notification that is generated when a high capacity alarm entry crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps.
PAGE 1515
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME 113 TRAP OID MIB File Explanation TR_BATCH_CONFI 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5. batchConfigCommi G_IN_PROGRESS 1.2.0.4 tProgress DELLNETWORKINGCOPY-CONFIGMIB.mib The agent generate this trap when a configuration commit is initiated 114 TR_BATCH_CONFI 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5. batchConfigCommi G_COMPLETE 1.2.0.5 tCompleted DELLNETWORKINGCOPY-CONFIGMIB.
PAGE 1516
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID 129 TR_VLT_ICL_STA TUS_CHANGE MIB File Explanation 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.17 dellNetVLTIclStatu .2.0.2 sChange DELLNETWORKINGVIRTUAL-LINKTRUNK-MIB.mib The agent generates this notification to denote the change in InterConnect Link Status.The notification contains information on the new ICL status. The possible states are as follows: 1. NotEstabished 2. LinkUp 3. LinkDown 4. LinkError" 130 TR_VLT_PEER_ST 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.
PAGE 1517
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID 132 TR_VLT_ICL_BW_ THRESHOLD_EXC EED 133 TR_VLT_DOMAIN _CFG_ERROR 134 135 Object Name MIB File Explanation 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.17 dellNetVLTIclBwUs .2.0.5 ageExceed DELLNETWORKINGVIRTUAL-LINKTRUNK-MIB.mib The IFM agent generates this notification to denote the change in Bandwidth usage of ICL Link, when it crosses the threshold above 80 %. The possible states are as follows: 0. Below threshold 1. Above threshold" 1.3.6.1.4.1.
PAGE 1518
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME 138 TR_ENT_CONFIG_ 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.2.0.1 CHANGE 1518 SNMP Traps TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation entConfigChange entity.mib An entConfigChange notification is generated when the value of entLastChangeTim e changes. It can be utilized by an NMS to trigger logical/physical entity table maintenance polls.
PAGE 1519
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation notificationevents, e.g., due to throttling or transmission loss. 139 TR_CHM_STACK_ UNIT_ROLE 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.46 dellNetSysAlarmSta DELLckUnitRoleChanged NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib Trap generated when a stack unit's role in a stack changes to management/ standby/member 140 TR_CHM_VERSIO N_MISMATCH 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.
PAGE 1520
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 148 TR_BRM_PE_UNI T_DOWN 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.30 dellNetSysAlarmPE UnitDown DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The driver/agent generate this trap when a PE Unit operational status is down 149 TR_SYSLOG_SER VER_CONNECTIO N_SUCCESSFUL 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3 0.1.1.2 Not Available Not Available Connecting to server with Valid configuration. 150 TR_SYSLOG_SER VER_CONNECTIO N_FAILURE 1.3.6.1.4.
PAGE 1521
53 Stacking All commands in this chapter are specific to the Dell EMC Networking OS. You can use the commands to pre-configure a switch, so that the configuration settings are invoked when the switch is attached to other S-Series units. For information about using the S-Series stacking feature, see the Stacking S-Series Switches section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. CAUTION: You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with virtual link trunking (VLT).
PAGE 1522
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Added the members option. Usage Information Enabling this command keeps the failed switch in the Failed state. The switch does not reboot until it is manually rebooted. When enabled, it is not displayed in the running-config. When disabled, it is displayed in the running-config. Related Commands show redundancy — displays the current redundancy status.
PAGE 1523
Protocols Defaults lacp Enter the LACP protocol xstp Enter one of the following protocols: STP, RSTP, MSTP, PVST. Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. 8.
PAGE 1524
Example Related Commands DellEMC#reset stack-unit 4 DellEMC#00:15:00: %STKUNIT1-M:CP %CHMGR-5-STACKUNIT_RESET: stack-unit 4 being reset 00:15:01: %STKUNIT1-M:CP %CHMGR-2-STACKUNIT_DOWN: stack-unit 4 down reset 00:15:01: %STKUNIT1-M:CP %IFMGR-1-DEL_PORT: Removed port: Gi 4/1-4/48, Te 4/51-4/52, 00:15:01: %STKUNIT2-S:CP %IFMGR-1-DEL_PORT: Removed port: Gi 4/1-4/48, Te 4/51-4/52, DellEMC#00:15:08: %S3048-ON:1 %IFAGT-5-STACK_PORT_LINK_DOWN: Changed stack port state to down: 1/49 00:15:08: %STKUNIT1-M:CP %CHMG
PAGE 1525
-----------------------------------------------Stack-unit State: Standby Peer Stack-unit ID: 2 Stack-unit SW Version: 1-0(0-4812) -- Stack-unit Redundancy Configuration ------------------------------------------------Primary Stack-unit: mgmt-id 1 Auto Data Sync: Full Failover Type: Hot Failover Auto reboot Stack-unit: Enabled Auto failover limit: 3 times in 60 minutes -- Stack-unit Failover Record ------------------------------------------------Failover Count: 0 Last failover timestamp: None Last failover R
PAGE 1526
Usage Information Example Example (Status) Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. The following describes the show system stack-ports command shown in the following example. Field Description Topology Lists the topology of stack ports connected: Ring, Daisy chain, or Standalone. Interface The unit/port ID of the connected stack port on this unit. Link Speed Link Speed of the stack port (12 or 42) in Gb/s. Admin Status The only currently listed status is Up.
PAGE 1527
Example (Topology) Related Commands DellEMC#show system stack-ports topology Topology: Ring Interface Connection --------------------1/53 6/53 1/54 2/53 2/53 1/54 2/54 3/53 3/53 2/54 3/54 4/53 4/53 3/54 4/54 5/53 5/53 4/54 5/54 6/54 6/53 1/53 6/54 5/54 DellEMC# ● reset stack-unit – resets the designated stack member. ● show hardware stack-unit – displays the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member.
PAGE 1528
stack-unit provision Preconfigure a logical stacking ID of a switch that joins the stack. This is an optional command that is executed on the management unit. Syntax stack-unit [stack-number] provision {model-identifier} Parameters Defaults stack-number Enter a stack member identifier of the switch that you want to add to the stack. model-identifier Enter the model identifier of the switch to be added as a stack member. This identifier is also referred to as the provision type.
PAGE 1529
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.12.0 Reset command mode from EXEC to CONFIGURATION. The following message displays to confirm the command. Setting ports Fo 1/60 as stack group will make their interface configs obsolete after a reload.
PAGE 1530
● reset stack-unit — resets the designated stack member. ● show system — displays the status of all stack members or a specific member. ● show version — displays the current Dell EMC Networking OS version information on the system.
PAGE 1531
54 Storm Control The Dell EMC Networking OS storm control feature allows you to limit or suppress traffic during a traffic storm (Broadcast/ Unknown Unicast Rate Limiting or Multicast on the C-Series and S-Series). Storm control is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Important Points to Remember ● Interface commands can only be applied on physical interfaces (virtual local area networks [VLANs] and link aggregation group [LAG] interfaces are not supported).
PAGE 1532
show storm-control broadcast Display the storm control broadcast configuration. Syntax show storm-control broadcast [interface] Parameters interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface-specific storm control configuration: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1533
● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1534
● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1535
Parameters Defaults percentagedecim E-Series Only: Enter the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in or out of the al_value in | out network. Optionally, you can designate a decimal value percentage, for example, 55.5%. The decimal range is from .1 to .9. wred-profile name E-Series Only: Enter the keyword wred-profile followed by the profile name to designate a wred-profile. packets_per_sec ond in Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network.
PAGE 1536
Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1537
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMUX (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-series and S-Series.
PAGE 1538
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-series and S-Series. storm-control PFC/LLFC Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC frames more than the configured rate. Syntax storm-control pfc-llfc [pps]in shutdown Parameters Defaults pfc-llfc in Enter the keyword pfc-llfc to get the flow control traffic. The range is from 0 to 33554368 packets per second. shutdown Enter the keyword shutdown to shut down the port when the rate exceeds.
PAGE 1539
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added the percentage decimal value option. 6.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1540
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added the percentage decimal value option.
PAGE 1541
55 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The commands in this section configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1d spanning tree protocol (STP) and are supported on the Dell EMC Networking switch/routing platform. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • bridge-priority bpdu-destination-mac-address debug spanning-tree description disable forward-delay hello-time max-age protocol spanning-tree show config show spanning-tree 0 spanning-tree bridge-priority Set the bridge priority of the switch in an IEEE 802.1D spanning tree.
PAGE 1542
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. bpdu-destination-mac-address Use the Provider Bridge Group address in Spanning Tree or GVRP PDUs.
PAGE 1543
To disable debugging, use the no debug spanning-tree command. Parameters stp-id Enter zero (0). The switch supports one spanning tree group with a group ID of 0. protocol Enter the keyword for the type of STP to debug, either mstp, pvst, or rstp. all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations. bpdu (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug bridge protocol data units. config (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword config to debug configuration information.
PAGE 1544
Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the spanning tree (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-stp”.) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON.
PAGE 1545
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● protocol spanning-tree — enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
PAGE 1546
Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● max-age — changes the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information. ● hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. hello-time Set the time interval between generation of the spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). Syntax hello-time seconds To return to the default value, use the no hello-time command.
PAGE 1547
max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the spanning tree bridge. Syntax max-age seconds To return to the default values, use the no max-age command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a number of seconds the Dell EMC Networking OS waits before refreshing configuration information. The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds.
PAGE 1548
Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1549
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1550
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
PAGE 1551
Example Field Description “Designated port...” Displays the designated port ID. DellEMC# show spann 0 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.0a56 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 We are the root of the spanning tree Current root has priority 32768 address 0001.e800.
PAGE 1552
Example (Guard) Field Description Interface Name STP interface. Instance STP 0 instance. Sts Port state: root-inconsistent (INCON Root), forwarding (FWD), listening (LIS), blocking (BLK), or shut down (EDS Shut). Guard Type Type of STP guard configured (Root, Loop, or BPDU guard).
PAGE 1553
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1554
56 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell EMC Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell EMC Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell EMC Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell EMC Networking Open Automation guide.
PAGE 1555
Usage Information ● When you run the command, the system displays a message with the information directing to the URL for further information. ● Even before you accept or reject the EULA, the configuration data is sent to the default centrally deployed SupportAssist Server. If you reject the EULA, the configuration data is not transmitted to the SupportAssist server. ● If there is an existing SupportAssist configuration, the configuration is not removed and the feature is disabled.
PAGE 1556
SUPASSIST_PKG_UNINSTALLED: SupportAssist package uninstalled DellEMC(conf)# Related Commands ● support-assist — moves to the SupportAssist Configuration mode. support-assist Move to the SupportAssist configuration mode. Syntax support-assist To remove all the configuration of the SupportAssist service, use the no support-assist command. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1557
This command starts the configuration wizard for the SupportAssist. At any time, you can exit by entering Ctrl-C. If necessary, you can skip some data entry. Once you exit the wizard, the Dell EMC Networking OS starts a full transfer. support-assist activity Trigger an activity event immediately. Syntax Parameters support-assist activity {full-transfer | core-transfer} start now full-transfer Enter the keyword full-transfer to specify transfer of configuration, inventory, logs, and other information.
PAGE 1558
Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. Introduced the core-transfer and event-transfer parameters. Usage Information 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1559
contact-person Configure the contact name for an individual. Syntax contact-person [first ] last To remove the contact person and all their details, use the no contact-person [first ] last command. Parameters first-name (Optional) Enter the first name for the contact person. This is optional provided each contact person name is unique. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. last-name Enter the last name for the contact person.
PAGE 1560
Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. server Configure the name of the remote SupportAssist Server and move to SupportAssist Server mode. Syntax server {default | server-name} To delete a server, use the no server server-name command. Parameters Defaults default Enter the keyword default for the default server. server-name Enter the name of the custom server to which the logs would be transferred.
PAGE 1561
local-file-name Enter the name of the local action-manifest file, up to 32 characters long. Allowable characters are: a to z, A to Z, 0 to 9, -, _, and space. Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST ACTIVITY FULL-TRANSFER SUPPORTASSIST ACTIVITY EVENT-TRANSFER Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.
PAGE 1562
Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. Usage Information To replace the default action-manifest with a customized one, copy the action-manifest file to the system using the action-manifest get command and then use the action-manifest install command. To revert to the default action-manifest file, use the action-manifest install default command.
PAGE 1563
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.
PAGE 1564
address Configure the address information for the company. Syntax address [city company-city] [{province | region | state} name] [country company-country] [{postalcode | zipcode] company-code] To remove a portion of the company address information, use the no address [city | province | region | state | country | postalcode | zipcode] command. For example, to remove the city alone, use the no address city command. To remove the complete company contact information, use the no address command.
PAGE 1565
address2..addres (OPTIONAL) Enter the street address of the company site. Up to 8 fields are s8 allowed. Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST COMPANY Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1566
email-address Configure the email addresses to reach the contact person. Syntax email-address primary email-address [alternate email-address] To remove an email address, use the no email-address command. To remove the primary and the alternate email addresses, use the no email-address primary and no email-address alternate commands respectively. Parameters primary email- address alternate emailaddress Enter the keyword primary then the primary email address for the person.
PAGE 1567
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. The phone numbers may contain country codes, area codes and extensions, if necessary. Allowable characters are 0 to 9, x, (, ), - and +. This command is optional for SupportAssist service configuration.
PAGE 1568
stop-time HH:MM Enter the keywords stop-time then a stopping time expressed as HH:MM. Use the 24-hour clock format. Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST PERSON Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148.
PAGE 1569
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.
PAGE 1570
Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST SERVER Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.
PAGE 1571
performance information, network configuration information, host/server configuration & performance information and related data (Collected Data) and transmits this information to Dell. By downloading SupportAssist and agreeing to be bound by these terms and the Dell end user license agreement, available at: www.dell.
PAGE 1572
Example DellEMC# show running-config support-assist ! support-assist enable all ! activity event-transfer enable action-manifest install default ! activity core-transfer enable ! contact-company name Dell street-address F lane , Sector 30 address city Brussels state HeadState country Belgium postalcode S328J3 ! contact-person first Fred last Nash email-address primary des@sed.com alternate sed@dol.
PAGE 1573
2016 09:43:56 IST event-transfer 2016 09:48:21 IST full-transfer 2016 09:38:27 IST DellEMC# Success Feb 15 2016 09:47:43 IST Feb 15 Success Feb 15 2016 09:36:12 IST Feb 15 SupportAssist 1573
PAGE 1574
57 System Time and Date The commands in this section configure time values on the system, either using the Dell EMC Networking OS, or the hardware, or using the network time protocol (NTP). With NTP, the switch can act only as a client to an NTP clock host. For more information, see “Network Time Protocol” of the Management section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 1575
Defaults end-day Enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. end-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year. end-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. end-year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
PAGE 1576
start-week (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following as the week that daylight saving begins and then enter values for start-day through end-time: ● week-number: Enter a number from 1 to 4 as the number of the week in the month to start daylight saving time. ● first: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the first week of the month. ● last: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the last week of the month.
PAGE 1577
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Updated the start-day and end-day options to allow for using the three-letter abbreviation of the weekday name. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ntp trusted-key — configures a trusted key. ● clock summer-time date — sets a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a one-time basis.
PAGE 1578
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Coordinated universal time (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8.
PAGE 1579
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1580
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.2.1.0 Added options [0 | 7] for entering the authentication key. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1581
Usage Information Version Description 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, FN–IOM, MIOA, MXL, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T– ON, S5048F–ON, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. NTP control key is not configured by default. If the encryption–type (0 or 7) is not specified, then 0 is selected by default. ntp broadcast client Set up the interface to receive NTP broadcasts from an NTP server. Syntax ntp broadcast client To disable broadcast, use the no ntp broadcast client command.
PAGE 1582
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1583
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. ntp offset-threshold Configure the threshold time interval before which the system generates an NTP audit log message if the time difference from the NTP server is greater than a threshold value (offset-threshold). Syntax ntp offset-threshold threshold-value To disable the threshold value, use the no ntp offset-threshold command.
PAGE 1584
maxpoll polling- interval Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword maxpollthen the polling-interval. The polling interval range is from 4 to 16. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) The trusted-key range value is increased from 1 to 65534.
PAGE 1585
(KoD) packet. When the Dell EMC Networking OS client receives KoD packets, it logs the following syslog message: Dell EMC# May 27 14:32:13 %STKUNIT1-:CP %ntp-6-: receive: KoD packet from 300::2 has inconsistent xmt/org/rec timestamps. Ignoring. Related Commands ● show ntp associations—displays the NTP servers that are configured and their status. ntp source Specify an interface’s IP address to be included in the NTP packets.
PAGE 1586
Version Description 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ntp step-threshold Configure the step-threshold time interval. Syntax ntp step-threshold value To return to the default NTP step-threshold value, use the no ntp step-threshold command. Parameters Defaults value Enter the threshold value in milliseconds. The range is from 128 to 5000 milliseconds (5 seconds).
PAGE 1587
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.
PAGE 1588
Example Example (Detail) Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC#show clock 11:05:56.949 UTC Thu Oct 25 2001 DellEMC# DellEMC# show clock detail 12:18:10.
PAGE 1589
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ntp associations command shown in the Example below. Field Description (none) One or more of the following symbols could be displayed: ● ● ● ● ● Example (without ntp master configuration) Example (with ntp master configuration) * means synchronized to this peer. # means almost synchronized to this peer.
PAGE 1590
Related Commands ● show ntp status — displays the current NTP status. show ntp vrf associations Displays the NTP servers configured for the VRF instance . Syntax show ntp [vrf] associations. Command Modes EXECEXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1591
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1592
58 Tunneling Tunneling is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • ip unnumbered ipv6 unnumbered tunnel allow-remote tunnel destination tunnel dscp tunnel flow-label tunnel hop-limit tunnel keepalive tunnel-mode tunnel source ip unnumbered Configure a tunnel interface to operate without a unique IPv4 address and select the interface from which the tunnel borrows its address.
PAGE 1593
Usage Information The ip unnumbered command fails in two conditions: ● If the logical ip address is configured. ● If Tunnel mode is ipv6ip (where ip address over tunnel interface is not possible). To ping the unnumbered tunnels, the logical address route information must be present at both the ends. NOTE: The ip unnumbered command can specify an interface name that does not exist or does not have a configured IPv6 address.
PAGE 1594
tunnel allow-remote Configure an IPv4 or IPv6 address or prefix whose tunneled packets are accepted for decapsulation. If you do not configure allow-remote entries, tunneled packets from any remote peer address is accepted. This feature is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Syntax tunnel allow-remote {ip-address | ipv6-address} [mask] To delete a configured allow-remote entry use the no tunnel allow-remote command. Any specified address/mask values must match an existing entry for the delete to succeed.
PAGE 1595
Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter the destination IPv4 address for the tunnel. ipv6–address Enter the destination IPv6 address for the tunnel. none Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL (conf-if-tu) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1596
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S4810, S4820T, Z9000.
PAGE 1597
tunnel hop-limit Configure the method to set the IPv4 time-to-live or the IPv6 hop limit value in the outer tunnel header. Syntax tunnel hop-limit value To restore the default tunnel hop-limit, use the no tunnel hop-limit command. Parameters Defaults value Enter the hop limit (ipv6) or time-to-live (ipv4) value to include in the tunnel header. The range is from 0 to 255. The default is 64.
PAGE 1598
Defaults Tunnel keepalive is disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1599
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added the decapsulate-any command. 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the S6000 and Z9000. To enable a tunnel interface, use this command.
PAGE 1600
Usage Information 1600 Tunneling Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added the tunnel source anylocal command. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000 and Z9000. Added an optional keyword “anylocal” to the tunnel source command.
PAGE 1601
59 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if you use this with NIC teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link.
PAGE 1602
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50. ● downstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface.
PAGE 1603
description Enter a text description of an uplink-state group. Syntax Parameters Defaults description text text Text description of the uplink-state group. The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10.0.2 Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1604
Defaults none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10.0.2 Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.
PAGE 1605
Related Commands Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50. ● downstream — assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. ● uplink-state-group — create an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links.
PAGE 1606
enable Enable uplink state group tracking for a specific UFD group. Syntax enable To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command. Defaults Upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group. Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1607
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.
PAGE 1608
Example Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.
PAGE 1609
Usage Information Version Description 9.10.0.2 Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.
PAGE 1610
example: gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 port-channel 1-3,5. A comma is required to separate each port and port-range entry. Defaults none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10.0.2 Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1611
60 VLAN Stacking With the virtual local area network (VLAN)-stacking feature (also called stackable VLANs and QinQ), you can “stack” VLANs into one tunnel and switch them through the network transparently. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports this feature. For more information about basic VLAN commands, see the Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands section in Layer 2.
PAGE 1612
● Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped. ● Yellow: Lower priority packets that are treated as best-effort. ● Red: Lowest priority packets that are always dropped (regardless of congestion status). Defaults Disabled; Packets with an unmapped DEI value are colored green. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1613
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1614
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Usage Information Enable the stackable VLAN (using the vlan-stack compatible command) on the VLAN prior to adding a member to the VLAN. Related Commands ● vlan-stack compatible — enables stackable VLAN on a VLAN.
PAGE 1615
vlan-stack access Specify a Layer 2 port or port channel as an access port to the stackable VLAN network. Syntax vlan-stack access To remove access port designation, use the no vlan-stack access command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1616
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1617
Parameters c-tag-dot1p value Enter the keyword c-tag-dot1p then the customer dot1p value that is mapped to a service provider do1p value. The range is from 0 to 7. sp-tag-dot1p value Defaults Enter the keyword sp-tag-dot1p then the service provider dot1p value. The range is from 0 to 7. none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1618
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. C-Series and S-Series accept both bytes of the 2-byte S-Tag TPID. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.
PAGE 1619
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1620
interface Vlan 20 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/42 shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)# do show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM Status Description * 1 Inactive 20 Active 100 Active DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)# Example 2 Q Ports T Gi 1/42 M Gi 1/42 DellEMC(config)# vlan-stack protocol-type 88A8 DellEMC(config)# interface gigabitethernet 3/10 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-3/10)# no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if
PAGE 1621
61 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to coexist on the same router at the same time. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ip vrf ip http vrf description ip vrf forwarding ip route-export ip route-import ipv6 route-export ipv6 route-import match source-protocol redistribute interface management maximum dynamic-routes show ip vrf show run vrf ip vrf Create or delete a customer VRF.
PAGE 1622
ip http vrf Configure an HTTP client with a VRF used to connect to the HTTP server. Syntax ip http vrf {management | vrf-name} To undo the HTTP client configuration, use the ip http vrf command. Parameters Defaults management Enter the keyword management for configuring the management VRF that uses an HTTP client. vrf-name Enter a VRF name that the HTTP client uses. If you do not specify a VRF name, the HTTP client uses the default VRF.
PAGE 1623
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series. ip vrf forwarding Attach an interface to a VRF.
PAGE 1624
you assign two interfaces to the same VRF, you cannot configure overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address to them.
PAGE 1625
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9500. To export all the routes corresponding to a source VRF, you can use the ip route-export tag command without specifying the route-map attribute. This action exposes source VRF routes to various other VRFs, which then import these routes using the ip route-import tag command.
PAGE 1626
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9500. It is possible to configure multiple import conditions per VRF depending on the exporting VRF. The export-target and import-target support only the match protocol and match prefix-list options. Other options that are configured in the route-maps are ignored. ● ip route-export – exports routes to another VRF. ipv6 route-export Enables route leaking between VRFs.
PAGE 1627
Only active routes are eligible for leaking. For example, if one VRF has two routes corresponding to BGP and OSPF, in which the BGP route is not active, the OSPF route takes precedence over BGP. Even though the target VRF has specified filtering options to match BGP, the BGP route is not leaked as that route is not active in the source VRF. Related Commands ● ipv6 route-import – imports IPv6 routes from another VRF.
PAGE 1628
Parameters bgp Enter the keyword bgp to leak or share routes corresponding to the BGP protocol. isis Enter the keyword isis to leak or share routes corresponding to the ISIS protocol. ospf Enter the keyword ospf to leak or share routes corresponding to the OSPF protocol. connected Enter the keyword connected to leak or share connected routes corresponding to the VRF. static Enter the keyword static to leak or share static routes corresponding to the VRF.
PAGE 1629
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9500. ● ip route-import — import routes from another VRF.
PAGE 1630
To remove the limit on the maximum number of routes used, use the no maximum dynamic-routes command. Parameters limit Maximum number of routes allowed in a VRF. The valid range is from 1 to 16,000 (or maximum allowable for that platform if a smaller value). warningthreshold The warning threshold value is a percentage of the limit value. When the number of routes reaches the specified percentage of the limit, a warning message appears. The valid range is from 1 to 100.
PAGE 1631
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z9000.
PAGE 1632
Usage Information Example 1632 Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z9000. This command displays information from the running-config corresponding to either a specific VRF or all the VRFs in the system.
PAGE 1633
62 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1634
proxy-gateway static Enables the proxy-gateway feature using static configurations. Syntax [no] proxy-gateway static Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1635
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000.
PAGE 1636
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. You must configure the VLT port channel interface which is connecting to the remote VLT domain as peer-domain-link.
PAGE 1637
vlt-peer-mac transmit Enables the device to transmit the peer MAC address along with its own MAC address in LLDP TLV packets to the remote VLT domain. S3048–ON Syntax [no] vlt-peer-mac transmit Command Modes VLT DOMAIN PROXY GW LLDP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1638
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1639
63 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core. VLT eliminates the requirement for Spanning Tree protocols by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches, and by supporting a loop-free topology.
PAGE 1640
arp additional-refresh Perform additional ARP refresh on the VLTi (ICL). Syntax arp additional-refresh To disable additional ARP refresh on VLTi, use the no arp additional-refresh command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(2.7) Introduced on all platforms.
PAGE 1641
Example Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.2(0.2) Added support for IPv6. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1642
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.2(0.2) Added multicast and ndp parameters. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1643
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S8420T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. To delay the system from bringing up the VLT port for a brief period to allow IGMP snooping and Layer 3 routing protocols to converge, use the delay-restore command. Use this command: ● after a VLT device reloads. ● if the peer VLT device was up at the time the VLTi link failed. Related Commands ● show vlt statistics — displays statistics on VLT operations.
PAGE 1644
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1645
To disable this feature on VLT and port channels, use no lacp ungroup member-independent {vlt | port-channel} command under the configuration mode. Example DellEMC(conf)#lacp ungroup member-independent ? port-channel LACP port-channel members become switchports vlt All VLT LACP members become switchports multicast peer-routing timeout To retain synced multicast routes or synced multicast outgoing interface (OIF) after a VLT peer node failure, configure the timeout value for a VLT node.
PAGE 1646
Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1647
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added the support for IPV6 / IPV4. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. peer-routing-timeout Configure the delay after which peer routing disables when the peer is unavailable. This command is applicable for both IPv6 and IPv4.
PAGE 1648
primary-priority Assign the priority for master election among VLT peers. Syntax [no] primary-priority Parameters Default value To configure the primary role on a VLT peer, enter a lower value than the priority value of the remote peer. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is 32768. 32768 Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1649
Usage Information Example (Brief) Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1650
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1651
Usage Information Example Example (igmpsnoop) Example (igmpsnoop interface port-channel) Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1652
show vlt detail Displays detailed status information about VLT domains configured on the switch. Syntax show vlt detail Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1653
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. DellEMC#show vlt inconsistency ip mroute Spanned Multicast Routing IIF Inconsistency Multicast Route LocalIIF -----------------------(22.22.22.200, 225.1.1.2) VLAN 5 (*, 225.1.1.
PAGE 1654
Vlan-config -----------Vlan-ID Local Mode ---------------00 Peer Mode --------- -- L3 Vlan IPV4 Multicast Status -------------------------Vlan-ID Local Status Peer Status ----------------------------4094 Active Inactive DellEMC# Example for Qin-Q implementation over VLT DellEMC#show vlt mismatch Domain -----Parameters Local Peer ----------------PB for stp Enabled Disabled Vlan-type-config ---------------Codes:: P - Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated, N - Normal vlan, M Vlan-stack Vlan-ID -------
PAGE 1655
Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1656
ndp Default Enter the keyword ndp to display the NDP VLT statistics. Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Command History Related Commands Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1657
IGMP IGMP IGMP IGMP IGMP IGMP Reg Response sent: 1 Reg Response rcvd: 1 PDU Tunnel Pkt sent: 5 PDU Tunnel Pkt rcvd: 10 Tunnel PDUs sent: 10 Tunnel PDUs rcvd: 19 VLT Multicast Statistics ------------------------------Info Pkts Sent: 4 Info Pkts Rcvd: 2 Reg Request Sent: 2 Reg Request Rcvd: 2 Reg Response Sent: 1 Reg Response Rcvd: 0 Route updates sent to Peer: 0 Route updates rcvd from Peer: 0 Route update pkts sent to Peer: 0 Route update pkts rcvd from Peer: 0 VLT NDP Statistics -------------------NDP NA
PAGE 1658
IGMP IGMP IGMP IGMP IGMP IGMP IGMP IGMP IGMP IGMP Info Pkts sent: 4 Info Pkts Rcvd: 1 Reg Request sent: 1 Reg Request rcvd: 2 Reg Response sent: 1 Reg Response rcvd: 1 PDU Tunnel Pkt sent:5 PDU Tunnel Pkt rcvd:10 Tunnel PDUs sent: 10 Tunnel PDUs rcvd: 19 system-mac Reconfigure the default MAC address for the domain. Syntax system-mac mac-address Parameters Defaults mac-address Enter the system MAC address for the VLT domain. Not configured.
PAGE 1659
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.
PAGE 1660
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information The VLT domain ID must be the same between the two VLT devices. If the domain ID is not the same, a syslog message generates and VLT does not launch. Related Commands ● show vlt brief — display the delay-restore value.
PAGE 1661
Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S4810, and S4820T.
PAGE 1662
64 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • IPv4 VRRP Commands IPv6 VRRP Commands IPv4 VRRP Commands The following are IPv4 VRRP commands. advertise-interval Set the time interval between VRRP advertisements. Syntax advertise-interval {seconds | centisecs centisecs } To return to the default settings, use the no advertise-interval command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds.
PAGE 1663
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Dell EMC Networking recommends keeping the default setting for this command. If you do change the time interval between VRRP advertisements on one router, change it on all routers. authentication-type Enable authentication of VRRP data exchanges.
PAGE 1664
Usage Information The system encrypts the password and the show config command displays the encrypted text string. clear counters vrrp Clear the counters maintained on VRRP operations. Syntax clear counters vrrp [vrrp-id] [ipv6] Parameters vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of the VRRP group ID to clear the group’s counters. The range is from 1 to 255. ipv6 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv6 to clear counters from the IPv6 VRRP group.
PAGE 1665
between 1 and 4, specify the port range as clear counters interfaces interfacetype 1/1/1 - 1/1/4. debug vrrp Enable VRRP debugging. Syntax debug vrrp [vrrp-id] {all | bfd | database | interface | ipv6 | packets | state | timer} To disable debugging, use the no debug vrrp [vrrp-id] {all | bfd | database | interface | ipv6 | packets | state | timer} command. Parameters vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the VRRP group ID. all Enter the keyword all to enable debugging of all VRRP groups.
PAGE 1666
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. If you do not specify an option, debug is active on all interfaces and all VRRP groups. description Configure a short text string describing the VRRP group. Syntax description text To delete a VRRP group description, use the no description command. Parameters Defaults text Enter a text string up to 80 characters long.
PAGE 1667
To re-enable a disabled VRRP group, use the no disable command. Command Modes VRRP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1668
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Added support for centisecs on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1669
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. priority Specify a VRRP priority value for the VRRP group. The VRRP protocol uses this value during the MASTER election process. Syntax priority priority To return to the default value, use the no priority command.
PAGE 1670
If you set the priority command to 255 and the virtual-address is not equal to the interface’s primary IP address, an error message appears. show config View the non-default VRRP configuration. Syntax show config [verbose] Parameters verbose (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword verbose to view all the VRRP group configuration information, including default information. Command Modes VRRP Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1671
Parameters vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the virtual router identifier for the VRRP group to view only that group. The range is from 1 to 255. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a table of information about the VRRP groups. interface type (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 1672
Item Description Pre States whether preempt is enabled on the interface: ● Y = Preempt is enabled. ● N = Preempt is not enabled. State Displays the operational state of the interface using one of the following: ● NA/IF (the interface is not available). ● MASTER (the interface associated with the MASTER router). ● BACKUP (the interface associated with the BACKUP router). Example (Brief) Usage Information Master addr Displays the IP address of the MASTER router.
PAGE 1673
Item Description ● Dn or Up states whether the interface is down or up. ● The interface type slot/port information. Example DellEMC> show vrrp -----------------GigabitEthernet 1/3, VRID: 1, Net: 10.1.1.253 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 105, Master: 10.1.1.253 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 1862, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.
PAGE 1674
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series (S50 only). 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.
PAGE 1675
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced support for telnetting to the VRRP group IP address assigned using this command. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when you configure a virtual IP address. When you delete the virtual address, the VRRP group stops sending VRRP packets.
PAGE 1676
vrrp delay reload Set the delay time for VRRP initialization after a system reboot. Syntax vrrp delay reload seconds Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds for the delay. The frange is from 0 to 900 (0 indicates no delay). 0 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1677
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1678
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. You can use the both command to migrate from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3. When you set the VRRP protocol version to both, the switch sends only VRRPv3 advertisements but can receive either VRRPv2 or VRRPv3 packets.
PAGE 1679
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.9(0.0) Added support to clear the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1680
vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the VRRP group ID. all Enter the keyword all to enable debugging of all VRRP groups. bfd Enter the keyword bfd to enable debugging of all VFFP BFD interactions. database Enter the keyword database to display changes related to group, prefix, and interface entries in the VRRP table. packets Enter the keyword packets to enable debugging of VRRP control packets. state Enter the keyword state to enable debugging of VRRP state changes.
PAGE 1681
● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan, and then a number from 1 to 4094. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a table of information on the VRRP groups. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf then the name of the VRF to view IPv6 VRRP groups corresponding to that VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1682
Line starting with Description ● Bad pkts rcvd displays the number of invalid packets received on the interface. Virtual MAC address Displays the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group. Virtual IP address Displays the virtual IP address of the VRRP router to which the interface is connected. Tracking states... Displays information on the tracked interfaces or objects configured for a VRRP group (track command), including: ● UP or DOWN state of the tracked interface or object (Up or Dn).
PAGE 1683
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.4.2.1 The range of valid VRID values on the E-Series when VRF microcode is loaded in CAM changed from 1 to 15. 8.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series, C-Series, and S-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when you configure a link-local virtual IP address.
PAGE 1684
65 X.509v3 X.509v3 is a standard for public key infrastructure (PKI) to manage digital certificates and public key encryption. This standard specifies a format for public-key certificates or digital certificates. Dell EMC Networking OS supports X.509v3 standards.
PAGE 1685
crypto ca-cert install Downloads and installs the certificate of a Certificate Authority (CA) on to the device. Syntax Parameters crypto ca-cert install path path Enter the path where the CA certificate is available for download. The format that you use to specify the location of the CA certificate also includes the protocol that is used to contact the CA.
PAGE 1686
● sysadmin ● secadmin The certificate matching the current FIPS state is deleted. If the system is in FIPS mode, the FIPS certificate is deleted. If the system is in non-FIPS mode, the non-FIPS certificate is deleted. Before deleting the system’s trusted certificate, the system prompts you to specify whether to proceed with deletion. If you proceed, the system deletes the certificate and also the private key.
PAGE 1687
device. If the Common Name does not match the device’s presented identity, then even a properly signed certificate does not validate correctly. email email- address Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword email followed a valid email address used for communication with the organization. validity days (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword validity followed by the number of days for which the certificate is valid. NOTE: For CSRs, validity has no effect.
PAGE 1688
crypto cert install Installs a trusted certificate on a device. Syntax crypto cert install cert-file cert-path key-file {key-path | private} [password passphrase] Parameters cert-file Enter the keyword cert-file to specify that the certificate needs to be downloaded. cert-path Enter the path where the certificate is locally stored. The path can be a full path or a relative path. If the system accepts this path, a notification is sent indicating the location where the certificate file is stored.
PAGE 1689
certificate. If the system is in non-FIPS mode, the certificate is installed as the non-FIPS certificate. When FIPS mode is enabled or disabled, the certificates (and keys) are switched by the system. NOTE: For the switch, there are two possible certificates stored - one for FIPS mode, one for nonFIPS mode. If the system is in FIPS mode, the certificate will be installed as the FIPS certificate. If the system is in non-FIPS mode, the certificate will be installed as the non-FIPS certificate.
PAGE 1690
Defaults accept Enter the keyword accept to accept the presented certificate and log in if OCSP retrieval fails. reject Enter the keyword reject to reject the presented certificate and log in if OCSP retrieval fails. crypto x509 revocation ocsp accept Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1691
Parameters hostname Enter the name of the host or device for which you wish to record logs corresponding to the certificates. NOTE: The hostname can be an IPV4 address, an IPV6 address, or a DNS hostname—with or without DNS suffix. secure Enter the keyword secure to enable the Syslog feature to communicate with a compatible Syslog server using the secure TLS protocol over the default port (6514). The range is from 1024 to 65535. tcp Enter the keyword tcp to enable TCP.
PAGE 1692
NOTE: To get the subject key identifier details, enter the show crypto cacert command. This command displays the CA certificate details. Defaults None. Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command: Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.
PAGE 1693
Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced this command. The following RBAC roles are allowed to issue this command: ● sysadmin ● secadmin Multiple OCSP responders may be configured per CA. The system tries each one until it gets a valid response. No priority may be specified or guaranteed; the system tries them in the order in which they were configured. Related Commands ● crypto x509 ocsp ocsp-server prefer Configures OCSP responder preference.
PAGE 1694
Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced this command. The following RBAC roles are allowed to issue this command: ● sysadmin ● secadmin This show command should display the index, the certificate’s subject field in plaintext, not-before and not-after dates, and the fingerprint in hexadecimal format. The index assigned to each CA certificate is used by the crypto cert delete certificate-authority command to allow the user to specify which certificate authority to remove.